MODEL

HQLM-3120W
㻟㻝㻙㼕㼚㼏㼔㻌㻠㻷㻛㻴㻰㻌㻹㼁㻸㼀㻵㻌㻲㻻㻾㻹㻭㼀㻌㻸㻯㻰㻌㻹㻻㻺㻵㼀㻻㻾

OPERATION MANUAL
㩷
 CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN.
SA 1965 SA 1966

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead inside a triangle is intended to warn the user that
parts inside the product are dangerous and many cause electric hazards.㻌
SA 1965

The exclamation mark inside a triangle is intended to inform users that important
operating and servicing instructions are provided with the equipment.㻌
SA 1966

WARNING: FOR CONTINUED SAFETY, REPLACE SAFETY CRITICAL COMPONENTS ONLY WITH
MANUFACTURE’S RECOMMENDED PARTS (REFER TO SERVICE LITERATURE).

DECLARATION of CONFORMITY :
The “CE” mark means the products as mentioned below will meet the intent of the following Directives and Standards.
Directives : 2014/30/EU for EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
2014/35/EU for Low voltage (Safety)
2011/65/EU for RoHS directive
Standards : HQLM-3120W: EN55032(Class A), EN55103-2-E4, EN60950-1

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR WATER.

Disposal of used Electric and Electronic Equipment

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This symbol on the product, or in the related documents in the package, indicates that this product shall not be
treated as normal household waste. Instead, it should be taken to a proper applicable collection point or depot
for the recycling of electric and electronic equipment.
By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent possible negative consequences for the environment and
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city authority, your household waste
disposal service or the place where you purchased the product.

NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user
will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CAUTION;
ANY CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PART RESPONSIBLE FOR
COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

i
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

5) For added protection for this television

1. General equipment during a lightning storm, or when it is
1) Read all instructions provided.
left unattended and unused for long periods of
2) Save these instructions for future use.
time, unplug it from the wall outlet.
3) Follow all warnings and instructions marked on
This will prevent damage to the equipment due to
the television equipment.
4) Never insert objects of any kind into this lightning and power-line surges.
television monitor through cabinet slots as they 6) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords
may come in contact with dangerous voltage as this can result in fire or electric shock.
points or short out parts, resulting in fire or
electric hazards. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the television monitor. 3. Usage and location
5) Do not attempt to service this television monitor
1) Do not use this television equipment near water -
yourself as operating or removing covers many
for example, near a bath tub, kitchen sink, or
expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards,
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
swimming pool.
6) Do not use attachments not recommended by the
2) Do not place this television equipment on an
television equipment manufacturer as they may
unstable cart, stand, or table. The television
result in the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury
equipment may fall, causing serious injury to
to persons.
7) This television monitor has been preadjusted to children and adults, and serious damage to the
meet the respective broadcasting standard equipment. Use only with a cart or stand
signals. So, it cannot be used with the signals of recommended by the manufacture, or sold with
different broadcasting standards. the television equipment. Wall or shelf mounting
8) When keeping or transporting the unit for a long should follow the manufacture’s instructions, and
time, pack it in the supplied carton or equivalent. should use a mounting kit approved by the
manufacture.
Television equipment
2. Power supply and cart combination
1) This television equipment should be operated should be moved with
only from the type of power source indicated on care. Quick stops,
the marking label. excessive force, and
2) This television equipment is provided with a uneven surfaces may
three-wire grounding type plug with a third cause the equipment
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a and cart combination to overturn.
grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety 3) Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or
feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into bottom are provided for ventilation, and to ensure
the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your reliable operation of the monitor and to protect it
obsolete outlet. from overheating. These openings should never
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the be blocked or covered by placing the television
grounding-type plug. equipment on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar
3) When connecting and disconnecting the power surface. (This television equipment should never
cable, be sure to hold the plug. be placed near or over a radiator or heat register.)
4) Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. This television equipment monitor should not be
Do not place this television equipment where the placed in a built-in installation such as a
cord will be abused by persons walking on it. bookcase unless proper ventilation is provided.

ii
 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

4) Avoid operating or placing (keeping) in a hot 3) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this
(+40Υ or over) or cold (less than 0Υ), high monitor, ask the service technician to perform
vibration, or dusty place. Avoid operating or routine safety checks to determine that the
storing in a place exposed to direct sunlight. television is in safe operating condition.
5) If an image of extremely high brightness is 4) For repair service, contact Panasonic’s authorized
displayed on the screen for a long time, the image sales representative or Panasonic service desk
may get burned in. directly.

4. Cleaning
1) Unplug this television equipment from the wall
outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
2) Do not use thinner or benzene for cleaning,
otherwise, the cabinet may deform or the paint
may peel away.

5. Repair
1) Unplug this television monitor from the wall outlet
and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a. When the power cord or plug is damaged or
frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the television.
c. If the television monitor has been exposed to
rain or water.
d. If the television does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by
the operating instructions as improper
adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work
by a qualified technician to restore the
television monitor to normal operation.
e. If the television monitor has been dropped or
the cabinet has been damaged.
f. When the monitor exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
2) When replacement parts are required, be sure the
service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacture that have the same
characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,
electric shock, or injury to persons.

iii
 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATIONS
1) Never let this unit fall or subject it to strong 7) Avoid using or storing this unit in the following
shock. places:
࣭ Hot (+40Υ or more) or cold (0Υ or less)
2) Do not remove the cabinet unless necessary. places, especially where this unit may be
High-voltage parts are contained in the cabinet exposed to the direct rays of the sun.
and they are very dangerous if you touch them. ࣭ Humid and dusty places.
Only qualified service engineers are allowed to ࣭ Places where there is considerable vibration.
adjust the internal parts of the cabinet. ࣭ Places exposed to rain or water.
࣭ When storing or transporting this unit, pack it
3) This color monitor has been adjusted to signals in the supplied carton or equivalent.
conforming to each broadcasting standard.
It cannot be used for signals of different 8) If no image can be monitored even after
broadcasting standards. performing user adjustment or the unit appears
Be sure to operate the color monitor within the faulty, do not dismantle this unit by yourself. In
voltage range marked on its back. such cases, contact the Ikegami service desk.

4) If cabinet or screen is dirty, wipe with soft cloth. 9) Should this unit fail within one year after
At this time, avoid using benzene or thinner, delivery, it will be repaired free of charge unless
otherwise the paint may peel away. the malfunction was caused by mishandling or
misuse of the user.
5) Note that, if video signals with high luminance However, the fuses are not covered by the
are monitored on the LCD panel over a long warranty.
period of time, the image may get burned into the
panel. 10) The specifications and appearance of this unit
may be subject to change for further
6) The socket-outlet shall be installed near the improvement without prior notice.
equipment and shall be easily accessible.

Cautions for Rack-Mount.

1) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a 4) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given
closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating to the connection of the equipment to the supply
ambient temperature of the rack environment circuit and the effect that overloading of the
may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, circuits might have on overcurrent protection and
consideration should be given to installing the supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of
equipment in an environment compatible with equipment nameplate ratings should be used
the maximum ambient temperature (Tma) when addressing this concern.
specified by the manufacturer.
5) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-
2) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment mounted equipment should be maintained.
in a rack should be such that the amount of air Particular attention should be given to supply
flow required for safe operation of the equipment connections other than direct connections to the
is not compromised. branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).

3) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the

equipment in the rack should be such that a
hazardous condition is not achieved due to
uneven mechanical loading.
iv
Precautions Upon Use
In order to use the monitor safely, read through this manual and pay attention to the following points
in particular.

1. Do not use any power supply other than the specified one (AC).

2. Do not give a shock to the monitor.

Be very careful to keep the monitor from shocks because glass is used inside the LCD.

3. Do not use or store the monitor in the following places.

Place where the ambient temperature is out of spec
When installing the monitor on a monitor shelf, switcher table, rack, etc., make sure in advance
that the temperature of the installation location is within the specified range.
In the case of an outdoor setup, even if the ambient temperature is within the specified range, the
inside of the monitor may be heated by direct sunlight. Therefore, keep radiation in mind. (Avoid
direct sunlight.)
Never block the air outlet at the rear of the monitor and the air inlet at the side. Make sure in
particular that a blackout curtain or the like does not block the air outlet.
Place exposed to rain, snow or high humidity
Use of the monitor in such a place will cause electric leakage or failure.

4. Please avoid direct sunlight on the screen.

Exposure of the LCD screen to direct sunlight for a long time will degrade the film. Therefore be
careful of direct sunlight when using the monitor outdoors.

5. Caution for the panel surface

Be careful not to touch the LCD panel front surface with bare hands, unless necessary. When
wiping the dust off the surface, use soft, dry cloth and take care not to rub the surface strongly.
Do not use thinner or benzene.

6. Do not touch liquid crystal leaked from the monitor's display surface.
If the monitor's display surface is accidentally broken and the liquid crystal leaks, be careful never
to put the liquid in your mouth, inhale it and allow it on your skin. If the liquid gets into your eye
or mouth, immediately rinse it with water and get medical attention.
If the liquid contacts your skin or clothes, immediately wipe it off using alcohol or the like and
wash the stained spot with soap and water. Do not leave the liquid intact, because otherwise your
skin or clothes may be affected.

7. Caution when used for a long continuous display and HDR operation
If the LCD panel is used for a long continuous display of fixed bright images, still images, etc. or
continuously used under hot and humid environment, after-images, lower luminance, seizure,
stains, streaks, discoloration etc., may occur due to the structure of the LCD panel.
Please avoid a long continuous display of videos with especially bright still images, white displays
of computer windows, videos that are smaller than the display area because of the aspect change,
etc. Also avoid continuously using it in a closed room that can be hot and humid or near outlets of
air conditioning equipment.
In addition, when HDR is used, the panel illuminates more brightly than conventional monitors;
thus, the panel deteriorates faster.
Although it depends on the operating environment of each customer, use of HDR generally speeds
up the secular change. Pay close attention to the panel condition when using the panel.
We have been asking to avoid long-time continuous use even with the conventional monitors. In
order to prevent the secular change, the following actions are recommended: to avoid displaying a
fixed bright image or still image; to avoid long-time operation with HDR; to lower the brightness
v
 in the non-HDR operations; to turn off the power supply of the main body while not using the panel.
(After-images may be gradually resolved by changing the screen display.)

8. Avoid operation at low temperatures.

The response speed of the liquid crystal decreases as the temperature decreases. Therefore, it is
recommended to use the monitor at room temperature.

9. Caution for condensation.

When the monitor is used in conditions where the temperature abruptly changes, the surfaces
outside and inside monitor may get condensation.
And if it is used having condensation, it can cause deterioration of quality and failure.
If the device has condensation, please do not turn on the power until water drops disappear
completely.

10. Avoid operation or storage in a place exposed to corrosive gas.

Operation or storage in a place where any corrosive gas such as sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide,
chlorine or ammonia is generated may lead to a significant reduction in the monitor service life.
It may also cause failure or electric leakage.
Also avoid using the monitor in a location exposed to high salty wind.

11. Do not use this monitor for critical applications such as space application, nuclear control
system, or medical equipment involving human life.

12. Considerations when storing the monitor in a hard carrying case.

The LCD panel used for this monitor has a very delicate structure that is composed of multiple
layers of expensive films. Therefore, the following considerations must be taken into account when
storing the monitor in a hard case.
 ࣭ If the monitor that has been stored at low temperature for a long time is suddenly exposed to
high temperature environment, dew condensation may occur. When you store the monitor in
the case for a long time, make sure to store at a temperature near room temperature and avoid
a sudden temperature change when taking out the monitor from the case.
 ࣭ If you are planning to store the monitor in the case for a long time, make sure to replace silica
gels, etc. in a regular basis and store the monitor at proper humidity as the humidity in the
case can cause corrosion.
 ࣭ If the monitor is stored in the case with water droplets or condensation for a long time, the
humidity stays in the case and can cause corrosion. Make sure to allow the monitor to dry well
before storing in the case.

Quality of LCD panel

Note that because the LCD panel mounted on the monitor is manufactured through the use of
high-precision technology, 99.99% or more of the pixels are effective, but 0.01% or less of them
may be lacking in brightness or lit up constantly.

vi
Internal fan
The internal fan does not run constantly but automatically starts running when the internal
temperature of the monitor rises. When the environmental temperature is low, the internal fan
may not be running, which indicates no fault condition.
At power-on, the fan rotates for a moment for checking its own performance.
In the case of outdoor use, even if the ambient temperature is low, the fan may start running
when the internal temperature of the monitor rises.
If the fan does not operate properly at power-on or at high temperatures, the message "FAN
ERROR!" will appear at the top of the screen.
The brightness of the backlight may be reduced in order to keep the internal temperature of the
motor from rising.
If the message "FAN ERROR!" is displayed, contact your dealer or Ikegami service desk.

Warranty
If the product should fail within one year from the date of delivery in spite of the proper use, the
manufacturer will repair the product free of charge. Even if the product is covered by the
warranty, however, the customer will be charged for labor and parts in the following cases.
1. Failure and damage caused by the following:
࣭Improper use
࣭Repair or modification performed by the customer
࣭Transportation, transfer, falling, etc. after the purchase of the product
࣭External factors such as natural disasters and over-voltage
2. LCD panel burn-in and aged deterioration (discoloration, burn-in, change in brightness,
increase in bright points and flashing, aged deterioration in HDR operation, etc.)
3. Scratch or dirt on the entire surface of panel, or damage, discoloration, and deterioration of
the chassis
4. Replacement of the accessories and fuse
If no image comes out in spite of routine adjustment or if the product should seem to fail,
contact your dealer or Ikegami service desk.

Accessories
The monitor comes with the following accessories. Be sure that they are included.
1. Operation manual: 1 copy
2. Parallel remote connector: 1 set
3. Power cable: 1 pc.
* VGA, SVGA, XGA, SXGA, WXGA, UXGA and WUXGA are registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corporation.
* VESA are registered trademarks of Video Electronics Standard Association.
* HDMI(High Definition Multimedia Interface) and HDMI logo are registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC.
* Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without prior notice.

vii
 㻌
HQLM-3120W

CONTENTS
㻌
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .......................... ii
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION.................................. iv
Cautions for Rack-Mount.................................................. iv
Precautions Upon Use ...................................................... v

5. Preset Menu Function ........................................... 49

1. Outline ...................................................................... 1
5-1 List of preset menu............................................. 49
1-1. Outline ............................................................... 1
How to change PRESET data ........................ 52
1-2. Features............................................................. 1

6. Mouse menu function............................................ 53

2. Names of parts and their Functions .................... 4
6-1. Basic procedure for using a mouse ...................... 53
2-1. Front Control Panel ............................................ 4
6-2. Basic procedures on the MENU and PRESET MENU
2-2. Rear panel.......................................................... 7
screens............................................................... 54
2-3. Rear panel (video inputs/outputs)........................ 8
2-4. External control.................................................. 10
7. Specifications ......................................................... 55
7-1. General specifications......................................... 55
3. Markers..................................................................... 11
7-2. Rated performance............................................. 55
3-1. Types of Markers .............................................. 11
7-3. Specifications for LCD Panel .............................. 56
7-4. Applicable Standards ......................................... 57
4. MENU Functions ...................................................
12
7-5. Functions........................................................... 57
4-1. MENU Outline...................................................
12
7-6. Remote control ................................................... 59
4-2. Description of MENU-4K/2K/MULTI Functions.. 13
4-3. Description of MENU-VIDEO Functions............. 16
8. Mounting.................................................................. 59
4-4. Description of MENU-AUDIO Functions ............ 17
4-5. Description of MENU-TC/WFM/VSC Functions.. 20
9. Options...................................................................... 59
4-6. Description of MENU-MARKER Functions ......... 22
4-7. Description of MENU-MARKER Functions
10. External View ......................................................... 60
(USER MARKER) Functions and Setup................... 24
How to preset new user markers .................................. 26
Data 1 Input Signal Compatible Formats................. 61
How to modify the user markers .................................. 27
Data 2 Parallel Remote Pin Functions...................... 64
4-8. Description of MENU-UTILITY Functions.......... 28
Data 3 RS-485 Pin Functions ................................... 66
4-9. Description of MENU-FUNC.SW Functions ...... 31
Data 4 Control with Remote Controller .................. 67
4-10. Description of MENU-P.REMOTE Functions...... 32
4-11. Description of MENU-UMD/IMD Functions ....... 33
UMD/IMD Indication Table ................................ 35
4-12. Description of MENU-C.CAPTION Functions..... 36
4-13. Description of MENU-USB MEMORY Functions 37
How to write from monitor to USB memory ........ 40
How to download from USB memory
to monitor........................................................... 41
Update of firmware............................................. 42
How to update MPU from USB memory ............. 43
How to update FPGA from USB memory ............ 44
4-14. Description of MENU-NETWORK Functions ..... 45
4-15. Description of MENU-RESET Functions ............ 46
4-16. Description of MENU-INFO. Functions .............. 47
 HQLM-3120W

HQLM-3120W 31-inch 4K/HD Multi Format LCD Monitor

1㸬Outline
㻌
1-1㸬Outline nectors for 3G-SDI. In addition, two input con-
This monitor adopts a 31.1-inch 4K UHD LCD nectors and two output connectors of 12G-SDI
panel. It is a 4K/2K multi-format HDR compatible and two input connectors and two output con-
monitor which is suitable to broadcasting opera- nectors of 3G-SDI out of five input and output
tions and systems which use digital cinema video connectors are shared.
footage. Furthermore, one input connectors for the HDMI
This monitor has 12G-SDI and HDMI as signal (compatible with HDCP2.2) is provided as
standard inputs in addition to conventional standard equipment.
HD/3G-SDI. Thus, inputting 4K video signal to 㻌
the monitor with only one cable becomes possible, (5) Compatible with multi-screen display and
easing the cable placements during the equipment 2K/HD enlarged display
installation. While inputting a 2K/HD format signal, the
This monitor is compatible with the functions screen can be divided to the maximum of four di-
and operation of the HEM/HLM series monitors, vided screens. When the multiple screen display
so it can realize the functions necessary for a is used, the input video format must be the same
broadcast monitor with conventional operation. between those divided screens.
㻌 For 2K / HD magnified display, display without
1-2㸬Features resizing, doubler and scaling processing can be
(1) 4K (4096 x 2160) LCD panel selected.
A 4K (4096 x 2160 dots) liquid crystal panel
features high brightness, high contrast, wide (6) Compatibility with embedded audio
viewing angle, quick response and good color re- It supports embedded audio as a standard, and
production. Accordingly, realistic images can be automatically recognizes the embedded audio
displayed with high fidelity gradation, and with- signal that is multiplexed into the 12G/3G/HD-
out having to resize the input pixels. SDI signal and the HDMI signal. It also enables
listening to the audio output from the built-in
(2) Compatible with HDR standard stereo speaker, stereo headphone and stereo line
It is compatible with Hybrid Log-Gamma for out.
video creation at a broadcast station and is opti- Audio output can support up to 16 channels for
mal for previewing HDR materials. It is also SDI signals and up to 8 channels for HDMI sig-
compatible with the PQ standard for movie crea- nals. For audio output, it is also possible to select
tion and content distribution. It can be used as a a pair of channels with the “MENU – AUDIO”
program or preview monitor for broadcasting and and select a simple down-mixed audio signal from
digital cinema creation. the surround signal.
The monitor also has a standard embedded
(3) Multi-format audio level meter display on the screen.
For input video format, it is compatible with It is possible to select 8 ch from the audio signal
2K/HD and 4K UHD formats. The input signal with the maximum of 16 ch to display.
format is automatically detected at the monitor
side. (7) Downmix function
When the inputs are 2K/HD interlace signals, IP Among the embedded audio 16 channels (max),
conversion is conducted for display. Also when the 5.1 channel surround audio channel (Lm, Rm, C,
inputs are 2K PsF signals, signals separated into Ls, and Rs) has been selected for the stereophonic
odd number fields and even number fields are audio function at the downmix mixing ratio spec-
displayed by rearranging to a progressive signal. ified by ARIB and ISO/IEC.

(4) Compatible with 12G-SDI and HDMI 2.0 as the (8) Function switch
standard equipment Various functions can be allocated to the
For input signal interface, it has two input con- F1 through F4 switches on the front panel
nectors and two output connectors for 12G-SDI by pre-setting in the menu.
and five input connectors and five output con-

-1-
HQLM-3120W
(9) Rotary encoder and MENU/UP/DOWN/LEFT (13) Various built-in test signals
/RIGHT SW A color bar signal, pluge signal, grayscale sig-
When the rotary encoder, MENU SW, and nal with pluge, window signal, 20% gray signal,
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT SW are used, calling of -6.8% to 0% & 100% to 109% signals are built in
the menu and operation of various settings has as a standard test signals for the monitor, various
been improved. In particular, when the rotary adjustment tasks can be performed by the moni-
encoder is used for controlling the white balance, tor itself.
the setting becomes smoother.
(14) Time code display function
(10) Remote control functions It is possible to display the time code
The monitor can be remote-controlled with the (VITC/LTC) multiplexed into the 3G/HD SDI
use of three remote control functions. Depending signal on the screen.
on the location of the installation and the type of The display comes in two sizes, large and small,
operation, parallel or serial modes can be used. and its brightness can be set in three levels.
Remote control with conventional parallel in-
put interface is equipped as a standard. (15) Waveform monitor display functions
The optional SRC-400 (option) serial remote In the case of HD/3G/12G SDI signal, the indi-
controller allows you to remote control up to 96 cation of the vector scope is possible. As the dis-
monitors individually or simultaneously by con- play type, Y, Cb, Cr or R, G, B component display
necting the monitors with loop-through. In addi- is available in addition to single channel display of
tion, since an Ethernet connection between the Y, Cb, Cr, R, G, and B.
SRC-400 and a PC is possible, you can individu- Two display sizes, there display intensity levels,
ally control the monitors that are connected to the and three display positions are available to select
SRC-400 via an application on the PC. The op- from.
tional RCT-30A infrared wireless remote control- In addition, for the display color of the wave-
ler is also available. form, either WHITE or GREEN for Y&G, BLUE
for Cb&B, or RED for Cr&R as a match compo-
(11) Built-in markers and user marker function nent can be selected.
The monitor can display markers according to
various aspect. The monitor also comes standard (16) Vector scope display functions
with five-part split and ten-part split crosshatch In the case of HD/3G/12G SDI signal, the indi-
markers useful for safty marker and location cation of a simple vector scope is possible. As
alignment. with the waveform monitor, the display size
Up to 10 scene files of user markers can be comes in two sizes, NORMAL and SMALL, and
plotted. Also up to 12 types of lines or BOX its brightness in four levels. The waveform can
markers per 1 scene can be plotted to any given also be displayed in any of three selectable posi-
position and size on a pixel basis. tions and in one of two colors: GREEN and
The line and box drawing settings can be eas- WHITE.
ily made with not just the rotary encoder switch
but also by using a USB mouse. The resulting (17) External memory function
data may also be saved on a USB memory so that Various data (including the MENU settings
the data can be copied to another monitor or and, the PRESET data, and user markers data)
stored in a PC. can be stored on a USB memory for data man-
This function is optimum for positioning in ed- agement on a PC. All data can be copied onto
iting the layout and its display for various types another monitor.
of information such as teleshopping. * In case the data is to be copied onto another mon-
* It is patented. itor, care should be taken as the PRESET data on
individual monitors are different in their data
(12) Shadow function types.
The shadow function is to shade the area other
than a 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9 or 16:9 marker area on
images. The shadow contrast can be set at 0%,
20%, 40% or 60% in the MENU. The use of this
function allows you to instantly visualize the im-
age area when converting images with an aspect
ratio of 16:9 to those with an aspect ratio of 4:3.

-2-
 HQLM-3120W
(18) USB mouse control (23) Switching between HDR and color space by
By connecting a commercially available USB payload
mouse to the USB terminal of this monitor, it is By the payload compatible with ITU-R BT.2077
possible to perform various adjustments including and ITU-R BT.1120-9, switching of HDR and
the “MENU setting,” “PRESET data setting,” switching of color space are conducted automati-
“Input signal switching,” and the “Front switch cally. In addition, if automatic following of the
setting” through the use of a mouse. Remote signal is not desired, manual operation is also
operation of the monitor at a distant position is available by the menu setting.
possible by using a commercially available wire-
less mouse.
Use of the scroll wheel function of the mouse
will significantly improved the user-friendliness
of the monitor for making adjustment of various
data such as color temperature.

(19) UMD/IMD display with TSL protocol

This function is used to integrally control the
UMD/IMD display using "TSL UMD protocol
V3.1”.
Characters (alphanumeric) and TALLY can be
displayed.
V3.1 can centrally control up to 32 units per line
(system) using RS-485.
By increasing the number of lines, you can set
the IDs and perform individual control for up to
126 devices.
IMD 㸸In Monitor Display
UMD 㸸Under Monitor Display

(20) UMD/IMD display with user display

Sets a material name (alphanumeric) with up
to 8 characters to individual monitor for each in-
put and displays the preset material name with
the UMD/IMD display when the input channel is
switched.
When multi mode is used, the character display
can be displayed on four screens.

(21) Image & TEST signal MIX function

While the image is displayed, a "pluge signal of
-2%/0%/+2%"can be displayed at the same time in
the corner of the screen (small enough not to dis-
turb the image) so that you can check if there is
no "black sun" effect caused by the brightness
adjustment while looking at the image.
A "brightness signal of 100 to 109%" is also
displayed at the same time so that you can check
if the signal of 100% to 109% is not saturated
when it is input due to the contrast adjustment.

(22) Closed caption display

Decoding the closed caption signals (compatible
with CEA-608/CEA-708 standard) superimposed
to the HD-SDI signal and displaying on the screen
is available.

-3-
HQLM-3120W

2㸬Names of parts and their Functions

㻌
2-1㸬Front Control Panel
䕿
㻞㻣 㻌 㻞㻠 㻌 䕿
䕿 㻞㻡 㻌 䕿
㻞㻢 㻌 䕿
㻞㻣 㻌

㻹㻭㻺㼁㻭㻸
㻹㻱㻺㼁 㻼㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀 㻿㻰㻵 㻯㻴㻌㻮 㻲㻝 㻲㻞 㻲㻟 㻲㻠 㻯㻴㻾㻻㻹㻭 㻮㻾㻵㻳㻴㼀 㻯㻻㻺㼀 㻭㼁㻰㻵㻻 㻿㻱㻸㻱㻯㼀
㻴㻰㻹㻵

㻱㻺㼀 㻱㻿㻯 㼀㻱㻿㼀 㻹㻻㻺㻻 㻭㻼㼀 㻿㻯㻾㻱㻱㻺 㻹㻭㻾㻷

㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻾㻭㻺㻳㻱
㻴㻽㻸㻹㻙㻟㻝㻞㻜㼃㻌㻌㻠㻷

䐟㻌 䐠㻌 䐡㻌 䐥㻌 䐦㻌 䐨㻌 䐩㻌 䐪㻌 䐫㻌

㻹㻭㻺㼁㻭㻸
㻌 㻹㻱㻺㼁 㻼㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀 㻿㻰㻵 㻯㻴㻌㻮 㻲㻝 㻲㻞 㻲㻟 㻲㻠 㻯㻴㻾㻻㻹㻭 㻮㻾㻵㻳㻴㼀 㻯㻻㻺㼀 㻭㼁㻰㻵㻻
㻴㻰㻹㻵
㻌 㻱㻺㼀 㻱㻿㻯 㼀㻱㻿㼀 㻹㻻㻺㻻 㻭㻼㼀 㻿㻯㻾㻱㻱㻺 㻹㻭㻾㻷
㻌 㻻㼂㻱㻾㻌㻾㻭㻺㻳㻱

㻌
㻌 㻞㻞 㻌 㻞㻟 㻌
䕿 䕿 䐢㻌 䐣㻌 䐤㻌 䐧㻌 䐬㻌 䐭㻌 䐮㻌 䐯㻌 䐰㻌 䐱㻌 䐲㻌 䕿
㻞㻝 㻌
㻌
㻌
ձ POWER switch ࣭ With the menu off and the marker on, the image
࣭ This switch is used to turn ON/OFF the monitor. pattern can be preset with the and switches
* This switch will not fully turn OFF the AC power and the safety marker area with the and
supply for the monitor. switches in the range of 80-99%
* It takes several seconds for an image to come up ࣭ For UP/DOWN, it is possible to ‫ۑ‬ 26 rotate the

after power-on.㻌 rotary encoder.

POWER LED IJ INPUT SELECT switch

࣭This LED is lit up in green when the power supply ࣭ Use the and switches to change input
for the monitor is ON. sources.
㻌 ࣭ The switching method changes depending on the
ղ MENU switch VIEW MODE setting in the menu.㻌
࣭This switch is pressed to display the menu screen [4K MODE]:
and to change the menu screen. CH-A1/CH-B1/CH-B1㹼4(QuadLink4K)/HDMI
࣭MENU display is also possible by long press of the [2K MODE]:
rotary encoder, item ‫ۑ‬
26 . CH-A1/CH-B1/CH-B2/CH-B3/CH-B4/HDMI
* This switch is disabled when the preset menu is [MULTI MODE]: Can not select.
displayed. ࣭ For VIEWMODE, refer to “4-2 Functions of
4K/2K MULTI.”
ճ PRESET switch 
࣭ This switch is pressed to display the preset menu. ո CH-B switch
* This switch is disabled when the menu is dis- ࣭ Use this switch to change channels in the SDI
played. input mode.
࣭ The way of switching changes by the VIEW-
մ ENT switch MODE setting in the menu.㻌
࣭ Press this switch to execute menu operations. [4K MODE]䠖CH-A1/CH-B1䡚B4
࣭ In addition, pressing the ‫ۑ‬ rotary encoder also [2K MODE]䠖CH-A1/CH-B1
operates in the same way as ENT. [MULTI MODE]䠖Can not select.
࣭For VIEWMODE, refer to “4-2 Functions of
յ ESC switch 4K/2K MULTI.”
࣭ This switch is pressed to escape from menu op-
eration.

ն  (UP)/ (DOWN)/ (LEFT)/ (RIGHT) switch

࣭ Use this switch to change menu items or the
setting of each item when a menu or preset menu
is displayed.

-4-
 HQLM-3120W
չ TEST switch ս F4 switch
࣭ Press this switch to display internal test signals. ࣭ Press this switch to select an item preset in the
࣭ The switching between the following seven types “MENU-FUNC.SW-FUNCTION-MODE”.
of TESTS signals is done each time this switch is ࣭ For presettable items, refer to "4-9. Description
pressed. In addition, the Color Bar signal is not on MENU-FUNC. SW Functions"
displayed when in the HDR mode and the color
space BT.2020 are selected. վ MONO switch
࣭ When turning the color signal into monochrome,
䠘㼀㻱㻿㼀㻌㻿㻵㻳㻺㻭㻸㻌㻼㻵㻯㼀㼁㻾㻱䠚 press this switch.
- 6.8%䚷- 6%䚷- 4%䚷- 2%

0%
տ APT switch
࣭ When correcting APERTURE, press this switch.
100%䚷102%䚷104%䚷106%䚷108%䚷109% ࣭ The correcting amount of APERTURE is set
㻨㻺㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘㻪 㹼 100䡚109%! from “MENU - VIDEO - APERTURE - LEVEL”.

րSCREEN switch
࣭ Press this switch to display images in R, G or B
0%㹼100%
*UD\VFDOH
+ 2%
0%
- 2%
individually.
࣭ The switching between colors takes place as fol-
lows each time this switch is pressed.
㻨㻳㼞㼍㼥㻌㼟㼏㼍㼘㼑㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌㼜㼘㼡㼓㼑㻪 㻨㻲㼡㼘㼘㻌㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㼎㼍㼞㻪 “R only” Ѝ “G only” Ѝ “B only” Ѝ “Normal
Screen”
+ 2% + 2%

ց  MARKER switch
࣭ Press this switch to turn on/off markers.
* This function is disabled when an internal test
- 2% 100% - 2%
signal is displayed.
㻨㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻮㼍㼞㻪 㻨㻼㼘㼡㼓㼑㻪
㻌
ւ CHROMA manual control
࣭ This control serves as a manual/preset switch
for chroma or a manual data variable control.
࣭ The control pops out when it is pressed and the
mode is changed to MANUAL.
100% Window! % Gary!
փ BRIGHT manual control
࣭ This control serves as a manual/preset switch
պ F1 switch
for brightness or a manual data variable control.
࣭ Press this switch to select an item preset in the
࣭ The control pops out when it is pressed and the
“MENU-FUNC.SW-FUNCTION-MODE”.
mode is changed to MANUAL.
࣭ For presettable items, refer to "4-9. Description
on MENU-FUNC. SW Functions"
քCONT manual control
࣭ This control serves as a manual/preset switch
ջ F2 switch
for contrast or a manual data variable control.
࣭ Press this switch to select an item preset in the
࣭ The control pops out when it is pressed and the
“MENU-FUNC.SW-FUNCTION-MODE”.
mode is changed to MANUAL.
࣭ For presettable items, refer to "4-9. Description
࣭ This control can be an allocation to BACK-
on MENU-FUNC. SW Functions"
LIGHT according to the
“MENU-UTILITY-CONT VR ASSIGN” setting.
ռ F3 switch
࣭ Press this switch to select an item preset in the
“MENU-FUNC.SW-FUNCTION-MODE”.
࣭ For presettable items, refer to "4-9. Description
on MENU-FUNC. SW Functions"

-5-
HQLM-3120W
द AUDIO control फ Rotally Encoder (RE)
࣭ Use this control to adjust the sound volume of a) Push
the front speaker or the headphones. ࣭MENU operation
* The embedded audio channel to output from the Push the switch while MENU is displayed to se-
speaker is set from “MENU - AUDIO - LINE/SP lect each MENU item and perform its function.
CH”.
* If you input an audio signal of -10 dBFS or more b) Long Press
with embedded audio, distortion will occur even ࣭If the MENU display is OFF, a long press of the
if you lower the audio volume. RE switch displays the MENU. If the MENU is
Especially in continuous sound of -10 dBFS or displayed, a long press of the RE switch regis-
more, the sound has distortion. ters the settings and turns off the MENU dis-
* Distortion may occur when the audio volume is play.
used at max.
Long

pressing
ध OVER RENGE indicator
࣭OVER RANGE increases the contrast or brightness
with high brightness signal. If it exceeds the dynamic
range of the signal processing circuit, the LED lights
Long
up. pressing
࣭Please reduce the contrast or brightness to use.
࣭If both the ABL and OVER RENGE are operated, Display
the LED flashes quickly (approx. 0.25 sec. inter- off
val)

न Infrared receiver of wireless remote control

࣭When a wireless remote controller (RCT-20A/
RCT-30A) is used, point it towards this receiver.

c) Rotating
ऩ Stereo headphones output (stereo mini-jack
࣭ Rotate the RE switch while the MENU is dis-
type)
played to select items.
࣭ Analog audio signals, embedded audio signals
࣭ This switch is also used for drawing USER
and downmix audio signals are fed out of this
MARKERS and varying data.
terminal.
࣭ The analog and embedded inputs can be selected
ब Speakers
in MENU-AUDIO-LINE/SP CH.
࣭ Analog audio signals, embedded audio signals
* If you are using a sound isolating headphone,
and downmix audio signals are fed to the
some residual sound may be heard even when
speakers.
the sound volume is set to minimus.
࣭ The analog and embedded inputs can be selected

in “MENU-AUDIO-LINE/SP CH”.
पUSB terminal
࣭ With the headphones being connected, no sound
࣭ Connect a USB memory, and the monitor’s data
is heard from the speakers.
(“MENU setting,” “PRESET data setting,” and
“USER MARKER setting”) can be saved on the
USB memory or the data on the USB memory can
be downloaded to another monitor.
* It is possible some memory devices do not work
in the USB memory slot of the monitor, please
try another memory in that case.
࣭ Connect a USB mouse, and the user markers
can be drawn.

-6-
 HQLM-3120W
2-2㸬Rear panel (left)
㻌
䐢㻌 㻔㻲㻭㻺㻝㻕㻌 䐣㻌 䐢㻌 㻔㻲㻭㻺㻞㻕㻌
㻌
㻌 䐠㻌
㻌
㻌
䐤㻌
㻌
㻭㻯㻌㻵㻺
㻌 㻝㻜㻜㻙㻝㻞㻜㼂
㻞㻜㻜㻙㻞㻠㻜㼂
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
䐟㻌 䐡㻌
㻌
䐥㻌
㻌
㻌

ձ AC power input յ Handle
࣭ Insert an AC cable here to supply AC power. ࣭ It is used when taking out from a carrying case
etc. In addition, because it is large in size and
ղ Lock weight, please use a dolly or the like if it is
࣭ After inserting an AC plug, lock the AC plug transported.
with this lock to prevent it from disconnecting.
 ն VESA Mount
ճMAIN POWER switch ዘ VESA mount of “100 x 100mm” or “200 x 100mm”
࣭ Turns on/off the AC power supply to the monitor. can be installed here.
࣭ To operate the monitor, turn ON this MAIN-
POWER switch as well as the POWER switch շ )L[HGVWDQG
on the front panel. ࣭ The attached stand is a stand dedicated to this
monitor.
մ Fan1/2 * Do not use it for other models.
ዘ When power is turned on, the fan starts running
for the operational check. Then, it automatically
operates according to the internal temperature.
ዘ When the fan does not start operating even the ‫ی‬PRECAUTION
set temperature to start fan operation is reached, ࣭Connect the power cord included with this unit to a
the following message is displayed on the screen. 3-pin outlet with ground terminal.
FAN1 ERROR! : FAN on the left side as seen 
from the back
FAN2 ERROR! : FAN on the right side as seen
from the back

-7-
HQLM-3120W
2-3㸬Rear panel (video inputs/outputs)

㻿㻰㻵
㻝㻞㻳㻛㻟㻳㻛㻴㻰
㻵㻺

䐟 㻯㻴㻙㻭㻝
䐥㻌
㻻㼁㼀
㻟㻳㻛㻴㻰
㻽㼡㼍㼐

㻵㻺

䐠 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝

㻻㼁㼀

㻵㻺
㻾㻿㻙㻠㻤㻡
䐡 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞
㻻㼁㼀
㻵㻺

㻵㻺 䐦㻌
䐢 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻟 㻻㼁㼀
㻻㼁㼀

㻵㻺
PARALLEL
䐣 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻠 REMOTE 䐧㻌
㻻㼁㼀

㻸㻭㻺
㻸
OUT 䐨㻌
䐤
㻾

㻭㼁㻰㻵㻻

ձ SDI CH-A1(12G/3G/HD) singal input and ճ SDI CH-B2(3G/HD) singal input and output
output 䞉 A 3G/HD signal is input to the "IN" connector.
䞉 A 12G/3G/HD signal is input to the "IN" con- 䞉 The input signal format is automatically detected.
nector. 䞉 The input signal is output from the "OUT" con-
䞉 The input signal format is automatically de- nector by an active loop through.
tected.
䞉 The input signal is output from the "OUT" con- մ SDI CH-B3(3G/HD) singal input and output
nector by an active loop through. 䞉 A 3G/HD signal is input to the "IN" connector.
䞉 The input signal format is automatically detected.
ղ SDI CH-B1(12G/3G/HD) singal input and 䞉 The input signal is output from the "OUT" con-
output nector by an active loop through.
䞉 A 12G/3G/HD signal is input to the "IN" con-
nector.
䞉 The input signal format is automatically de-
tected.
䞉 The input signal is output from the "OUT" con-
nector by an active loop through.

-8-
 HQLM-3120W
ߋ SDI CH-B4(3G/HD) singal input and output չ PARALLEL REMOTE signal input
䞉 A3G/HD signal is input to the "IN" connector. ࣭Connect the accompanying remote connector here.
䞉 The input signal format is automatically detected. ࣭Use shielded wire for the cable.
䞉 The input signal is output from the "OUT" con- ࣭For the setting items, refer to "4-10. Function ex-
nector by an active loop through. planation of MENU - P.REMOTE".
Supplementary explanation
* When displaying 4K images, input 12G signal in ߐ Analog Audio output
SDI CH-A1 or CH-B1. Or input a signal of the 䞉㻌 The embedded audio output channel signal set to
following Quad Link 4K by using four channels MENU-AUDIO-LINE/SP CH is output as an analog
of CH-B1 to CH-B4. audio signal (stereo).
<In case of 2 sample interleave (2SI)>
CH-B1 Sub Image 1
CH-B2 Sub Image 2 Reference
CH-B3 Sub Image 3
a) Cables for 12G-SDI signal
CH-B4 Sub Image 4
In case of 12G-SDI transmission, the quality of coax-
Reference standards: SMPTE ST425-5, ST274,
ial cable has great impact. Bent and/or stamped cable,
ST2018-2
and age deterioration of the GND shield may gener-
<In case of SQUARE Division (SQD)> ate impedance mismatch.
CH-B1 Upper left Bending, stepping on, or age deterioration of the cable
CH-B2 Upper right may lead to such condition.
CH-B3 Lower left In this type of coaxial cable, transmission error may
CH-B4 Lower right occur even in a short cable.
* In case of the multiple screen display, up to four
If a transmission error is displayed on the screen, use
screens can be displayed from SDI CH-B1
a new coaxial cable and try again.
through CH-B4 images.
* Recommended coaxial cable: L-5.5CUHD by Canare
ո Ethernet Electric Co., Ltd.
࣭ When controlling by Ethernet, connect a LAN
cable to this connector.
b) HDMI cable
In case of a HD signal, use the "High Speed" type
շ HDMI signal input HDMI cable. In case of 4K signal, use the "Pre-
࣭ Input an HDMI signal (HDCP compatible) here. mium High Speed" type HDMI cable. Use a cable
which is 3m or shorter.
ո RS-485 connection Also HDMI cables deteriorate due to bending, be-
䞉 Remote control from the optional serial remote ing flattened, and age deterioration. If the images
controller "SRC-400" is possible. are not displayed properly, use a new HDMI cable
䞉 Controlling "TSL UMD Protocol V3.1" is possi- and retry.
ble.
䞉 When not connecting by a loop through, use a
terminator.
䞉 Set the monitor ID number from "000 to 126" at
"MENU - UMD/IMD - TSL MONITOR ID."
䞉 For the set items, refer to "4-11. Functions of
MENU-UMD/IMD."

-9-
HQLM-3120W
2-4㸬External control

 㻾㻿㻙㻠㻤㻡㻌 㻳㼞㼛㼡㼜㻌㻟㻌 㻾㻿㻙㻠㻤㻡㻌 㻳㼞㼛㼡㼜㻌㻞㻌 㻾㻿㻙㻠㻤㻡 㻌 㻳㼞㼛㼡㼜㻌㻝 㻌

㻟㻞㼟㼑㼠㻌㼙㼍㼤 㻌 㻟㻞㼟㼑㼠㻌㼙㼍㼤 㻌 㻟㻞㼟㼑㼠㻌㼙㼍㼤 㻌

㻵㼚㼒㼞㼍㼞㼑㼐㻌
㼞㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻮㼞㼕㼐㼓㼑㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌
㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㼏㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌㻔㼍㼘㼘㻌
㼟㼠㼞㼍㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼏㼍㼎㼘㼑㻕㻌㼎㼥㻌
㻾㻿㻙㻠㻤㻡㻚

Ikegami
SRC-400
SERIAL REMOTE CONTROLLER

MONITOR NUMBER

㻰㼑㼐㼕㼏㼍㼠㼑㼐㻌 7 8 9

㼍㼜㼜㼘㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻝㻌㻞
CALL ALL 4 5 6

END 0 1 2 3
㻸㻭㻺

㼁㻿㻮

㻯㼑㼚㼠㼞㼍㼘㼕㼦㼑㼐㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻌㼛㼒㻌
㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼎㼥㻌㼡㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼐㼑㼐㼕㼏㼍㼠㼑㼐㻌
㼍㼜㼜㼘㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼒㼞㼛㼙㻌㻼㻯㻚

㻯㼑㼚㼠㼞㼍㼘㼕㼦㼑㼐㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻌㼛㼒㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㼟㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼢㼕㼍㻌
㼃㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌 㻿㻾㻯㻌㻙㻌㻠㻜㻜㻌㼡㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㻌㼏㼛㼙㼙㼑㼞㼏㼕㼍㼘㼘㼥㻌㼍㼢㼍㼕㼘㼍㼎㼘㼑㻌
㻯㼑㼚㼠㼞㼍㼘㼕㼦㼑㼐㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻌㼎㼥㻌㼟㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌
㼕㼚㼒㼞㼍㼞㼑㼐㻌㼞㼑㼙㼛㼠㼑㻌 㻎㼁㻿㻮㻌㼣㼕㼞㼑㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㼙㼛㼡㼟㼑㻎㻚
㼞㼑㼙㼛㼠㼑㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻌㻎㻿㻾㻯㻌㻙㻌㻠㻜㻜㻎㻚
㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻌㻎㻾㻯㼀㻙㻟㻜㻭㻎 㻵㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌㼜㼛㼟㼟㼕㼎㼘㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼍㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㼎㼑㻌
㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼐㻌㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼘㼥㻌㼒㼞㼛㼙㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼡㼟㼑㻚

-10-
 HQLM-3120W
3㸬Markers
3-1㸬Types of Markers
(1) Safety marker / Frame Marker
Active screen area

Frame marker [100% fixed]

Safety marker
[Variable from 80% to 99% (1% increments)]

(2) 5-division FURVVKDWFK

Active screen area

(3) 10-division FURVVKDWFK

Active screen area

(4) Cross marker

Active screen area

(5) Aspect marker

Active screen area

Aspect marker
[ 4:3/13:9/14:9/15:9/16:9 ]

(6) Aspect marker + Safety marker

Active screen area
Aspect marker
[ 4:3/13:9/14:9/15:9/16:9 ]
Safety marker in area,
[Variable from 80% to 99% (1% increments)]

(7) 1.85:1 Aspect marker

Active screen area

1.85:1 Aspect marker

(8) 2.35:1 Aspect marker

Active screen area

2.35:1 Aspect marker

࣭The displayed markers are set in “MENU-MARKER”.

࣭There are two kinds of settings (1): "FRM + SAFE" with frame marker and "SAFETY" without frame
marker. The figure in (1) is the setting state of "FRM + SAFE".

-11-
HQLM-3120W
4㸬MENU Functions
4-1㸬MENU Outline

㻌㻌

-12-
 HQLM-3120W
4-2㸬Description of MENU-INPUT Functions

㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
ձ VIEW MODE setting 䐣 4K MODE SDI-B1/2/3/4 SELECT setting
䞉 Set the combination of switching input signals. ࣭Setting ENABLE and DISABLE is possible. When
4K MODE Current mode DISABLE is set, Quad Link 4K which uses four
2K MODE Switches to the 2K mode.
channels of CH-B1 to CH-B4 is skipped by the tran-
MULTI MODE Switches to the MULTI mode.
sition of the front INPUT switch.
࣭Default setting is 4K MODE.
࣭Default is ENABLE..

ղ 4K MODE VIDEO SOURCE setting ն 4K MODE HDMI SELECT setting

䞉 Following items can be selected when VIEW MODE ࣭Setting ENABLE and DISABLE is possible. When
is 4K MODE. DISABLE is set, HDMI is skipped by the transition of
SDI-A1 the front INPUT switch.
SDI-B1 ࣭Default is ENABLE..
SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4 (Quad Link)
HDMI շ 4K MODE IMAGE DIVISION setting
䞉 In case of SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4, check four SDI cables ࣭The CH-B1/B2/B3/B4 signal type can be selected from
are input. the following items when VIEW MODE is 4K MODE.
࣭Default is SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4. AUTO Automatic judgment
SQUARE Two-by-two matrix divide

ճ 4K MODE SDI-A1 SELECT setting 2SI 2 Sample Interleave

࣭Setting ENABLE and DISABLE is possible. When ࣭Default is AQUARE.

DISABLE is set, CH-A1 is skipped by the transition
of the front INPUT switch. ո MULTI MODE VIEW MODE setting
࣭Default is ENABLE. ࣭Set the combination of switching input signals.
MULTI MODE Current mode
մ 4 K MODE SDI-B1 SELECT setting 4K MODE Switches to the 4K mode.
࣭Setting ENABLE and DISABLE is possible. When 2K MODE Switches to the 2K mode.
DISABLE is set, CH-B1 is skipped by the transition
of the front INPUT switch.
࣭Default is ENABLE..

-13-
HQLM-3120W
䐧 MULTI MODE MULTIPATTERN setting ջ MULTI MODE SRC GROUP setting
࣭The inputs CH-B1, CH-B2, CH-B3, and CH-B4 are ࣭When 4 MULTI
displayed in the tetrameric areas in the 4K-size SDI ONLY CH-B1, CH-B2, CH-B3, CH-B4
screen as follows. SDI + HDMI CH-B1, CH-B2, CH-B3, HDMI
The 4th screen becomes HDMI instead of CH-B4.
4 MULTI ࣭When 3 MULTI
SDI ONLY CH-B1, CH-B2, CH-B3
㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞 SDI + HDMI CH-B1, CH-B2, HDMI
CAMERA-A CAMERA-B SDI + HDMI CH-B1, CH-B2, and HDMI
The 3rd screen becomes HDMI instead of CH-B3.
㻯㻴㻙㻮㻟 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻠
࣭When 2 MULTI
CAMERA-C CAMERA-D
SDI ONLY CH-B1, CH-B2
3 MULTI SDI + HDMI CH-B1, HDMI
The 2nd screen becomes HDMI instead of CH-B2.
㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞 ࣭Default is SDI ONLY.
CAMERA-A CAMERA-B

㼃㻲㻹㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚㻌㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞㻕
ռ 2K MODE VIEW MODE setting
㻯㻴㻙㻮㻟 㼃㻲㻹㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚㻌㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝㻕
㼃㻲㻹➼㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞㻕
࣭Set the combination of switching input signals.
CAMERA-C 㼃㻲㻹㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚㻌㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻟㻕
2K MODE (Current setting)
2 MULTI MULTI MODE
4K MODE

㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝 㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞 ս 2K MODE VIDEO SOURCE setting

࣭Following items can be selected when VIEW MODE is
CAMERA-A CAMERA-B
㼃㻲㻹㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚㻌㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝㻕
㼃㻲㻹➼㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻝㻕 㼃㻲㻹㻌㼑㼠㼏㻚㻌㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞㻕
㼃㻲㻹➼㻔㻯㻴㻙㻮㻞㻕
2K MODE.
SDI-A1
SDI-B1
* Above condition is obtained when item շ MULTI SDI-B2
MODE SRC GROUP setting is SDI ONLY. SDI-B3
* In case of the interlace signal, some image contents SDI-B4
may show a horizontal line at the boundary of each HDMI
screen. This is due to the process corresponding to the ࣭Default is SDI-B1.
IP conversion.
࣭Default is 4 MULTI. վ 2K MODE SDI-A1 SELECT setting
࣭It is fixed to ENABLE. ࣭Skipping CH-A1 by the
պ MULTI MODE SYNC MODE setting
transition of the front INPUT switch is not possible.
࣭SYNCHRONOUS
When synchronization of inputs CH-B1, CH-B2,
տ 2K MODE SDI-B1 SELECT setting
CH-B3, and CH-B4 is known, set this mode.
࣭When DISABLE is set, CH-B1 is skipped by transition
Low delay mode.
of the front INPUT switch.
࣭ASYNCHRONOUSࠋ
࣭Default is ENABLE.
When inputs CH-B1, CH-B2, CH-B3, and CH-B4 are
asynchronous, set this mode. The display delays;
ր 2K MODE SDI-B2 SELECT setting
however, disturbance of video images by asynchro-
nous can be resolved. ࣭When DISABLE is set, CH-B2 is skipped by transition
࣭Default is SYNCRONOUS. of the front INPUT switch.
࣭Default is ENABLE.

ց 2K MODE SDI-B3 SELECT setting

࣭When DISABLE is set, CH-B3 is skipped by transition
of the front INPUT switch.
࣭Default is ENABLE.

-14-
 HQLM-3120W
ւ 2K MODE SDI-B4 SELECT setting द SDI RANGE setting
࣭When DISABLE is set, CH-B4 is skipped by transition ࣭When an SDI signal without the payload information
of the front INPUT switch. is input, the image may not be displayed properly
࣭Default is ENABLE. since the necessary information is missing. In that
case, the following signal range setting may be re-
փ 2K MODE HDMI SELECT setting quired in addition to द SDI STRUCTURE setting.
࣭When DISABLE is set, HDMI is skipped by transition ࣭AUTO : Automatic selection
࣭LIMITED : 64 to 940 (bit width when 10 bit)
of the front INPUT switch.
࣭SDI FULL : 4 to 1019 (bit width when 10 bit)
࣭Default is ENABLE.
࣭Default is AUTO.
When there is no payload information in AUTO,
ք SDI STRUCTURE setting
processing of LIMITED is conducted.
࣭When an SDI signal without the payload information
is input, the image may not be displayed properly
since the necessary information is missing. In that 䞢 HDMI (DVI) FORMAT setting
case, the format of input signal has to be set. Select ࣭When the DVI signal㸦2K/HD㸧is input to the HDMI
from a combination of the signal format (RGB/YCbCr), input terminal, specify RGB or YPbPr here, since the
sampling structure (422/444), and bit width (10 bit/12 DVI signal does not have RGB/YPbPr information.
bit). ࣭Default is RGB.
࣭AUTO : Automatic selection
࣭YCbCr422/10 : 422 color difference signal 10 bit 䞣 INPUT LOCK setting
࣭YCbCr444/10 : 444 color difference signal 10 bit ࣭When preventing the switching of the input channel,
࣭YCbCr444/12 : 444 color difference signal 12 bit set to "ON" to fix the input channel.
࣭RGB444/10 : 444 RGB signal 10 bit ࣭Default is OFF.
࣭RGB444/12 : 444 RGB signal 12 bit
䞤MIX TEST SIGNAL
࣭In addition to this setting, the setting of ध SDI ࣭EXECUTE
RANGE might be necessary. ࣭MIX TEST SIGNAL is displayed.
࣭Default is AUTO. While MIX TEST SIGNAL is displayed, executing
When there is no payload information in AUTO, EXCUTE again hides the MIX TEST SIGNAL.
processing of YCbCr422/10 is conducted. In addition, it becomes hidden after one minute from
the first display.
‫ی‬1RWH
࣭If SDI STRUCTURE is set to AUTO when the payload
information is incorrect for the image, "Image not
output / Menu not displayed / Menu flickering" may
occur.
In this case, press the TEST switch and with the in-
ternal TEST signal being displayed, set the SDI
STRUCTURE to match the input image.

‫ی‬1RWH
࣭When VIEW MODE is set to 4K MODE and if an
image judged to be 4K PsF format is input, the image
will only be output with SDI STRUCTURE is set to
AUTO. Settings other than AUTO will judge it as
NoSync and the operation will not output the image.

-15-
HQLM-3120W
4-3㸬Description of MENU-VIDEO Functions
㻌
㻌

㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
㻌
ձ Setting the chroma gain-up ON/OFF ն Setting the APERTURE LEVEL
࣭Set the gain-up ON/OFF for chroma. ࣭Set the APERTURE level in the range from 1 to 63.
࣭When Chroma Gain Up is On the chroma gain ࣭Default setting is 16.
increases by “+9 dB or +12dB”. 㻌
࣭This function can be assigned to a function switch շ Setting the APERTURE frequency
on the front panel. ࣭Set the boost frequency of APERTURE.
࣭Default setting is OFF. ࣭LOW Boost from around 10MHz
࣭MID1 Boost from around 15MHz
ղ Setting the gain-up level (9db/12dB) ࣭MID2 Boost from around 20MHz
࣭Sets the Chroma Gain Up level. ࣭HIGH Boost from around 25MHz
࣭Selects the Chroma Gain Up level from "+9dB or ࣭Default setting is HIGH.
+12dB". 㻌
࣭Default setting is 12dB. ո Setting the IP conversion mode
࣭It sets the movie detection mode when the interlace
ճ Setting the scan mode (NORMAL/NATIVE) signal is displayed by converting to progressive.
࣭While the input signal is 2K signal, switch the MOTION : Movie level high
mode which is converted up to 4K. STILL : Movie level low (lower than still
NORMAL㸸Scaler indication image)
Display by interpolating by the filter ࣭Default setting is MOTION.
NATIVE 㸸Doubler indication
Display the same pixels for
two-by-two in row and line.
࣭Default setting is NORMAL.

մ Setting the REAL SCAN ON/OFF

࣭In case of ON, if the input signal is 2K signal, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen
without enlarging or downsizing and without
resizing (with original number of pixels).
* MARKER turns to OFF.
࣭Default setting is OFF.

յ Setting the APERTURE ON/OFF

࣭Set the APERTURE ON/OFF.
࣭This function can be assigned to a function switch
on the front panel.
࣭Default setting is OFF.

-16-
 HQLM-3120W
4-4㸬Description of MENU AUDIO Functions

ձSetting the channels of embedded audio for ࣭MODE1 (1357-2468)

output
㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻝
࣭Set any of the following pairs of channels of
㻯㻴㻌㻝 㻯㻴㻌㻞
embedded audio to be output to the front speaker 㻯㻴㻌㻟 㻯㻴㻌㻠
㻯㻴㻌㻡 㻯㻴㻌㻢
and the headphone jack. 㻯㻴㻌㻣㻌 㻯㻴㻌㻤㻌
࣭CH1/2㹼CH15/16
In the case of CH1/2, outputs a pair chan-
nel of CH1 and CH2.
࣭DOWNMIX
Downmix from 5.1 ch surround sound.
࣭This function can be assigned to a function switch
on the front panel.
࣭When HDMI is selected as an image input, setting
CH9/10 through CH15/16 means that CH1/2
through CH7/8 are selected. ࣭MODE2 (1234-5678)
 MODE3 (1357-8642)
<Example of a pair channel selection in HDMI>
 MODE4 (12-34) 㸸During the display mode
Indication   → Actual selected channel
1-2ch and 1-4ch settings.
CH9/10 →  CH1/2
CH11/12 →  CH3/4  MODE4 (1234-5678) 㸸During the display mode
CH13/14 →  CH5/6 1-8ch settings.
CH15/16 →  CH7/8 * The display of MODE 4 varies depending on
࣭Default setting is CH1/2. the number of channels for the section յ.
㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻞䚸㻟䚸㻠
ղ Audio selection when the Multiple screen is
displayed MULTI SELECT
࣭When in the Multi screen mode, set one screen to
output audio out of two to four divided screens.
࣭Default setting is DISABLE.

ճ Setting the audio level meter display ON/OFF

࣭Used to turn on and off the audio level meter
display.
࣭Default setting is OFF. 㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻞 㻯㻴㻌㻡㻘㻢㻘㻣㻘㻤
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻟㻘㻡㻘㻣 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻟 㻯㻴㻌㻤㻘㻢㻘㻠㻘㻞
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻠㻌㻔㻠㼏㼔㻕 㻯㻴㻌㻟㻘㻠
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻠㻌㻔㻤㼏㼔㻕 㻯㻴㻌㻡㻘㻢㻘㻣㻘㻤
մ Setting the display mode of audio level meter-
ing
࣭Set the display mode of the audio level meter.
࣭The number in parentheses shows the order of
displayed channels.
࣭ MODES 5 to 8 are obtained by doubling the
width of MODES 1 to 4.

-17-
HQLM-3120W
࣭MODE5 (1357-2468) ն Setting the brightness of the audio level meter
㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻡 ࣭Set the brightness of the audio level meter.
㻯㻴㻌㻝 㻯㻴㻌㻞 ࣭The level meter image transmissive mode or
㻯㻴㻌㻟 㻯㻴㻌㻠
㻯㻴㻌㻡 㻯㻴㻌㻢 nontransmissive mode can be set.
㻯㻴㻌㻣㻌 㻯㻴㻌㻤㻌
࣭LOW
࣭MID
࣭HIGH
࣭LOW (MIX) (Image transmissive mode)
࣭MID (MIX) (Image transmissive mode)
࣭HIGH (MIX) (Image transmissive mode)
࣭Default setting is HIGH.

շ Setting the peak hold display of the audio level

࣭MODE6 (1234-5678) meter
MODE7 (1357-8642) ࣭Used to turn on and off the peak hold display.
MODE8 (12-34) 㸸During the display mode 1-2ch ࣭Default setting is ON.
and 1-4ch settings.
MODE8 (1234-5678) 㸸During the display mode ո Setting the reference level
1-8ch settings. ࣭Set the reference level of the audio level meter.
* The display of MODE 4 varies depending on ࣭-18dBFS
࣭-20dBFS
the number of channels for the section յ.
࣭Default setting is -20dBFS

㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻢䚸㻣䚸㻤
չ Downmix setting
࣭Set the 5.1 channel surround downmix.
࣭Mix the 5.1 channel surround audio signal as-
signed to 6 channels of embedded audio into 2
channels, and output to the speaker, the head-
phone and the audio monitor output.
࣭5.1ch surround sub woofer(LFE) channel is not
mixed.

պ Setting the downmix formats

࣭Select the mixing method to downmix 5.1ch audio
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻢 㻯㻴㻌㻡㻘㻢㻘㻣㻘㻤
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻟㻘㻡㻘㻣 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻣 㻯㻴㻌㻤㻘㻢㻘㻠㻘㻞 in “ISO/IEC” and “ARIB”.
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻤㻌㻔㻠㼏㼔㻕 㻯㻴㻌㻟㻘㻠
㻯㻴㻌㻝㻘㻞㻘㻟㻘㻠 㻹㻻㻰㻱㻌㻤㻌㻔㻤㼏㼔㻕 㻯㻴㻌㻡㻘㻢㻘㻣㻘㻤 ࣭Default setting is ISO/IEC

࣭Default setting is 1(1357-2468). ջ Setting the Ls/Rs level

࣭Set the coefficient of Ls/Rs to mix.
յ Setting the channel display of the audio level ࣭Set among -3dB/-6dB/-9dB/OFF.
meter  (OFF 㸻 㸫҄)
࣭The display channel of the audio level meter is ࣭Default setting is 㸫3dB
set. Within embedded audio 16 channels, up to 8
channels are allocated as follows. ռ Setting the embedded audio channel assign-
࣭CH 1㸫2 㸸CH1 to CH2 is displayed. ment of speaker (Lm)
࣭CH 1㸫4 㸸CH1 to CH4 is displayed. ࣭Set which embedded audio channel is allocated to
࣭CH 1㸫8 㸸CH1 to CH8 is displayed. the 5.1-ch surround Lm speaker (left side in
࣭CH 9㸫10㸸CH1 to CH2 is displayed. front).
࣭CH 9㸫12㸸CH1 to CH4 is displayed. ࣭Default setting is CH1
࣭CH 9㸫16㸸CH1 to CH8 is displayed.
࣭Default setting is CH 1-8. ս Setting the embedded audio channel assign-
ment of speaker (Rm)
࣭Set which embedded audio channel is allocated to
the 5.1-ch surround Rm speaker (right side in
front).
࣭Default setting is CH2

-18-
 HQLM-3120W
վ Setting the embedded audio channel assign-
ment of speaker (C)
࣭Set which embedded audio channel is allocated to
the 5.1-ch surround C speaker (center).
࣭Default setting is CH3

տ Setting the embedded audio channel assign-

ment of speaker (Ls)
࣭Set which embedded audio channel is allocated to
the 5.1-ch surround Ls speaker (left side in rear).
࣭Default setting is CH5

ր Setting the embedded audio channel assign-

ment of speaker (Rs)
࣭Set which embedded audio channel is allocated to
the 5.1-ch surround Rs speaker (right side in
rear).
࣭Default setting is CH6

-19-
HQLM-3120W
4-5㸬Description of MENU-TC/WFM/VSC Functions
* TC / WFM / VSC is supported for HD/3G/12G SDI signals.

ձ Setting the SDI TC display ON/OFF ն Setting of waveform display size

࣭Used to turn ON or OFF the VITC/LTC display ࣭The waveform display scale can be set to AUTO,
multiplexed with the ANC part of the signal. SDR, HLG, or PQ.
࣭ This function can be assigned to a function ࣭Default setting is AUTO.
switch on the front panel. 
࣭Default setting is OFF. շ Setting of waveform display position
࣭ Used to set the waveform display position,
ղ Setting of SDI TC display brightness RIGHT or LEFT.
࣭Used to set the SDI TC display brightness in ࣭Default setting is RIGHT.
three levels, LOW, MID and HIGH.
࣭Default setting is MID. ո Setting the waveform display color
࣭Used to set the waveform display color, WHITE or
ճ Setting of SDI TC display size COLOR.
࣭Used to select the SDI TC display size, NORMAL ࣭For COLOR settting, it is displayed in the fol-
or LARGE. lowing colors.
࣭Default setting is NORMAL. <RGB> <YCbCr>
R : Red Y ch : Green
G : Green Cb ch : Blue
B : Blue Cr ch : Red
࣭Default setting is WHITE.
㼂㻵㼀㻯㻌 㼂㻵㼀㻯㻌㻜㻜㻦㻜㻜㻦㻜㻜㻦㻜㻜㻌

㻺㻻㻾㻹㻭㻸㻌 㻸㻭㻾㻳㻱㻌 չ Selection of SIGNAL waveform display CH

մ Setting of waveform display ON/OFF ࣭Select the waveform channels to display from R,
࣭Used to turn ON or OFF the waveform display of G, B, RGB, Y, Cb, Cr, and YCrCb.
luminance signal. ࣭In the RGB waveform display mode, when the
࣭ This function can be assigned to a function input terminal signal is YCbCr, the levels may
switch on the front panel. be displayed out of position due to an operation-
࣭Default setting is OFF. al error of the matrix.
࣭Default setting is Y.
յ Setting of waveform display brightness
࣭Used to set the waveform display brightness in պ Setting the VSC (VECTOR SCOPE) display
three levels, LOW, MID, HIGH and HIGH(M). ON/OFF
࣭HIGH(M) mode displays the picture with WFM ࣭Used to turn on or off the VECTOR SCOPE dis-
overlay. play.
࣭Default setting is HIGH. ࣭ This function can be assigned to a function
switch on the front panel.
࣭Default setting is OFF.

-20-
 HQLM-3120W
ջ Setting the VSC (VECTOR SCOPE) display տ Setting the VSC (VECTOR SCOPE) display po-
brightness sition
࣭ Used to set the VECTOR SCOPE display ࣭Used to set the vector display to either the RIGHT
brightness in 3 levels: LOW, MID, HIGH and and LEFT positions.
HIGH(M). ࣭When used in common with the WFM, the VEC-
࣭HIGH(M) mode displays the picture with VSC TOR display is located on the left of the WFM one.
overlay. ࣭Default setting is RIGHT.
࣭Default setting is HIGH.
࣭RIGHT location
ռ Setting the VECTOR SCOPE display magnifica-
tion ratio VECTOR VECTOR WFM

࣭Used to set the VECTOR SCOPE display mag-

nification in 4 ratios: x1, x2, x4 and x8.
࣭Default setting is x1.

ս Setting the COLOR BOX scale display ࣭LEFT location

࣭Used to set the VECTOR SCOPE̓s COLOR BOX
according to the input color bar signal: 75% or VECTOR VECTOR WFM

100%.
࣭Default setting is 100%.

ր Setting the VECTOR SCOPE display color

࣭Used to set the vector display color to either of
GREEN and WHITE.
࣭Default setting is GREEN.

ց Setting of VSC (VECTOR SCOPE) display size

࣭Used to set the VECTOR SCOPE display size to
either of NORMAL and SMALL.
㻣㻡㻑㻿㻯㻭㻸㻱 㻝㻜㻜㻑㻿㻯㻭㻸㻱 ࣭Default setting is NORMAL.
վ Setting the COLOR BOX scal display
(color space)
࣭Used to set the VECTOR SCOPE̓s COLOR BOX
according to color space of the input signal:
AUTO, BT709 and BT2020.
࣭Default setting is AUTO.

-21-
HQLM-3120W
4-6㸬Description of MENU-MARKER Functions
<SCENE NAME> <SETTING OF USER MARKER>
NO.1 SCENE1䕕䕕 PAGE1
SCENE NAME SCENE1
NO.2 SCENE2䕕䕕
No. SW COL DATA(X Y)
NO.3 SCENE3䕕䕕 MK1 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
NO.4 SCENE4䕕䕕 E䠖 2048 1080
NO.5 SCENE5䕕䕕 MK2 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
NO.6 SCENE6䕕䕕 E䠖 2048 1080
MK3 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
NO.7 SCENE7䕕䕕
E䠖 2048 1080
NO.8 SCENE8䕕䕕 MK4 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
NO.9 SCENE9䕕䕕 E䠖 2048 1080
NO.10 SCENE1 0 䕕 MK5 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
RETURN
E䠖 2048 1080
MK6 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080
䕰(NEXT PAGE)

ձ Setting the type of marker ճ Setting the type of aspect marker

࣭Used to set various types of markers displayed. ࣭ Used to select the type of aspect marker from
࣭SAFETY 㸸 Displaying the safety marker “4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 1.85:1 and 2.35:1”.
preset in Item ղ .
࣭CROSS5 㸸 5-split crosshatch pattern.
Active screen area
࣭CROSS10 㸸 10-split crosshatch pattern.
࣭C.CROSS 㸸 Cross marker. Aspect marker
[ 4:3/13:9/14:9/15:9 ]
࣭ASPECT 㸸 Displaying the aspect marker
preset in Item ճ .
࣭ASP+SAF㸸 Displaying the aspect marker
preset in Item ճ and the safety Active screen area
marker in aspect marker area Aspect marker
㹙1.85:1 / 2.35:1㹛
preset in Item մ.
࣭This function can be assigned to a function switch
࣭Default setting is 4:3 marker.
on the front panel.

࣭Default setting is SAFETY. մ Setting the safety marker area in aspect marker
area
࣭Used to set the safety marker in the aspect
marker (4:3, 13:9, 14:9 and 15:9) area in the
SAFETY

80%-99% range with 1% increments.


FRM + SAFE ASPECT ASP + SAF


Active screen area

 Aspect marker
[ 4:3/13:9/14:9/15:9 ]

Safety marker in area,
C.CROSS CROSS5 CROSS10  variable from 80% to 99%
(1% increments)

ղ Setting the safety marker area ࣭Default setting is 80% (safety area).
࣭Used to set the safety marker area in the 80%- 99%
range with 1% increments. յ Setting the aspect marker display mode
࣭Used to set the aspect marker display mode.
Active screen area ࣭MARKER 㸸 Displaying the marker only.
100% area ࣭SHADOW 㸸 Displaying the shadow only
Variable from 80% to ࣭MRK+SHD㸸 Displaying both the marker
99% (1% increments) and shadow
࣭Default setting is MARKER+SHADOW.
࣭Default setting is 80% (safety area).

MARKER SHADOW MRK+SHD

-22-
 HQLM-3120W
ն Setting the aspect marker shadow level
࣭Used to set the contrast level of the aspect marker ࣭The name of each scene can be up to 8 characters in
shadow, when displayed. length with the following characters: "0-9, A-Z, (),
࣭Settings: 0%, 20%, 40% and 60% -, □ (blank)".
࣭Default setting is 40%. ࣭If you press ENT on the SCENE, the following
SETTING MENU is displayed, and there you can
շ Setting the center marker ON(TYPE-A/B)/OFF change the name of each SCENE.
࣭Used to turn on and off the center cross marker.
࣭There are two kinds of center markers TYPE-A or
TYPE-B.
࣭Default setting is OFF.

OFF TYPE-A TYPE-B

ո Setting the marker display level

࣭Used to set the marker display level.
࣭Settings: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and 100%
࣭Default setting is 80%.

չ Setting the marker display color

࣭Used to set the marker display color. <SCENE NAME> <SCENE NAME>

* The marker is displayed in the color preset on NO.1 SCENE1䕕䕕 NO.1 ABCDEFGH

the marker menu. NO.2 SCENE2䕕䕕 NO.2 SCENE2䕕䕕

NO.3 SCENE3䕕䕕 NO.3 SCENE3䕕䕕
࣭Settings㸸 White, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, NO.4 SCENE4䕕䕕 NO.4 SCENE4䕕䕕
red and blue NO.5 SCENE5䕕䕕 NO.5 SCENE5䕕䕕

࣭Default setting is white. NO.6 SCENE6䕕䕕 NO.6 SCENE6䕕䕕

NO.7 SCENE7䕕䕕 NO.7 SCENE7䕕䕕
NO.8 SCENE8䕕䕕 NO.8 SCENE8䕕䕕
պ Setting the user marker display ON/OFF NO.9 SCENE9䕕䕕 NO.9 SCENE9䕕䕕
SCENE1 0 䕕
࣭Used to turn on and off the user marker display. NO.10 SCENE1 0 䕕 NO.10
RETURN RETURN
࣭This function can be assigned to a function
࣭The switching of the scenes can be assigned to a
switch on the front panel.
function switch on the previous screen.
࣭Default setting is OFF.
࣭Default setting is SCENE1.

ջ Selecting each scene of user markers and set-
ռ Setting User Markers
ting the scene names
࣭Press RE with EXECUTE, and the user mark-
࣭The user markers can be set for up to 10 scenes; ersetting menu shows up. Now various settings
you can select from SCENE 1 to SCENE 10. can be made in this menu.
࣭For details, refer to Item “4-7. Description of
SCENE10 MENU-USER MARKER Functions and Setup”.

SCENE2

SCENE1

-23-
HQLM-3120W
4-7㸬Description of MENU-USER MARKER Functions and Setup
㻨㻼㻭㻳㻱㻝㻪 㻨㻼㻭㻳㻱䠎㻪
䐠 䐢 䐡 䐟 䐣
<SETTING OF USER MARKER> <SETTING OF USER MARKER>
PAGE1 PAGE2
SCENE NAME SCENE1 No. SW COL DATA(X Y)
No. SW COL DATA(X Y) 䕦(BACK)
MK1 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK7 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
MK2 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK8 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
MK3 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK9 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
MK4 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK10 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
MK5 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK11 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
MK6 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080 MK12 OFF 䕕 S䠖 2048 1080
E䠖 2048 1080 E䠖 2048 1080
䕰(NEXT PAGE) RETURN

ձ The scene name for user marker յ User marker coordinates

࣭ The scene name of the user marker to be set is ࣭In the ͆DATA (X Y)͇ column, the coordinates for
displayed, and you can use RE to change the S㸸START POINT and E㸸END POINT of the
scene. currently set user markers are displayed.࣭Move
the cursor to the X/Y data. Using the RE, new
ղ Types of user markers user markers can be drawn or already registered
࣭ The user markers are presettable in boxes or user markers can be modified.
lines, chosen from 12 types from MK1 to MK12. ࣭The setting can be made in 1-pixel increments.
Up to 12 different display positions of subtitles The top left of the effective screen serves as the
can therefore be individually preset, depending reference point (0001, 0001) of the coordinates.
on programs. From this point, the coordinates can be adjusted
࣭ Use the RE to select a desired item. in the pixel range of 4096 x 2160.
࣭Default setting is (2048,1080).

ճ Setting the user marker color

࣭ In the “COL” column, select a desired display
color from 7 colors. The 12 types of user markers
can be color-coded to identify them if two or more
user markers are used.
࣭ Settings : White, yellow, cyan, green, magenta,
red and blue
࣭ Default setting is white.

մ Setting the user marker display ON/OFF

࣭ In the “SW” column, the display can be turned on
and off.
࣭ Default setting is ON.

-24-
 HQLM-3120W
‫ە‬Resetting the data Accordingly, in drawing a horizontal line, the
With the ͆DATA (X Y)͇ in յ blinking,  Y-direction address has a coordinate value with
Turn the RE counter-clockwise a few times  3pixel added, as shown below.
will return it to the initial value. 
In the case of using a mouse, rotating the mouse Pixel position (X, Y) in the coordinate for the "start point"

wheel upwards a few times will return it to the

initial value.
ࠉ㹟

‫ە‬Coordinate reference point Pixel position (X+a, Y+3) in the coordinate for the "end point"

This 4096 x 2160, Full-HD panel has a pixel

reference point (0001, 0001) at the top left of the
screen. The pixel at the bottom right of the
When a vertical line is drawn, the X-axis address
screen is preset as the coordinates (4096, 2160).
has a coordinate value with 3 pixel added, as
shown below.
㻔㻜㻜㻜㻝㻌㻘㻜㻜㻜㻝㻕㻌 㻔㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌㻘㻜㻜㻜㻝㻕㻌
Pixel position (X, Y) in the coordinate for the "start point".
X axis
Y axis
ࠉ㹟

㻔㻜㻜㻜㻝㻌㻘㻞㻝㻢㻜㻕㻌 㻔㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌㻘㻞㻝㻢㻜㻕㻌
Pixel position (X+a, Y+3) in the coordinate for the "end point".

‫ە‬Marker lines and coordinate values

There are 4 line widths for the user markers.
However, the coordinate for the start point and
that for the end point are different by 3 pixel.

Pixel position in the coordinate for the "start point"

Line width: 2 pixels

Pixel position in the coordinate for the "end point"

-25-
HQLM-3120W

㻱㻺㼀
㻩 㻩 䕦㻌䕰
㻌㻴㼛㼣㻌㼠㼛㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㼚㼑㼣㻌㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㼟

㻌䐟㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲 㼄㻌㼍㼤㼕㼟 㻌䐣㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠 㼃㼕㼠㼔㻌㼚㼛㼠㼔㼕㼚㼓㻌

㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
<MARKER> START POINT(X : 2048 , Y : 1080) 㼕㼚㼕㼠㼕㼍㼘㻌㼄㻙㼅㻌
MARKER(16:9,1.90:1) SAFETY END POINT (X : 2048 , Y : 1080) 㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
SHADOW LEVEL 40%
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻘㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌
CENTER MARKER OFF 㻿㼑㼠㻌㼁㻿㻱㻾㻌 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻙㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌
㻹㻭㻾㻷㻱㻾㻌㼠㼛㻌㻻㻺㻚

㼅㻌㼍㼤㼕㼟
MARKER LEVEL 80% 㼄㻙㼅㻌㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌
MARKER COLOR 䕔
USER MARKER ON 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻌㼎㼘㼕㼚㼗㼕㼚㼓㻚
SCENE NAME SCENE1
SETTING EXECUTE
RETURN 㼃㼕㼠㼔㻌㼚㼛㼠㼔㼕㼚㼓㻌
㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞 㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌㼕㼟㻌
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㻌䐠㻌㻱㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻌䐤㻌㻹㼛㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠 㼐㼑㼒㼍㼡㼘㼠㻌㼏㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㻚
<MARKER>
MARKER(16:9) SAFETY START POINT(X : 0700 , Y : 0540)
END POINT (X : 2048 , Y : 1080) 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼔㼕㼒㼠㼑㼐㻌㼄㻙㼅㻌
SHADOW LEVEL 40% 㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
CENTER MARKER OFF
㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻾㻱㻌 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻚
MARKER LEVEL 80%
MARKER COLOR 䕔 㼚㼑㼣㻚㻌
USER MARKER ON 㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
SCENE NAME SCENE1
SETTING EXECUTE 㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌
RETURN 㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚

㻌䐡㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼐㼕㼢㼕㼐㼡㼍㼘㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㼟
㻌䐥㻌㻿㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠
<SETTING OF USER MARKER>
PAGE1 㻿㼑㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌 START POINT(X : 0700 , Y : 0540)
SCENE NAME SCENE1 㼍㼚㼐㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲㻌 END POINT (X : 0700 , Y : 0540) 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻙㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌
No. SW COL DATA(X Y)
MK1 ON 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌 㼄㻙㼅㻌㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼕㼚㼐㼕㼢㼕㼐㼡㼍㼘㻌 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻌㼎㼘㼕㼚㼗㼕㼚㼓㻚
MK2 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㼟㻚
MK3 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK4 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK5 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK6 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
䕰(NEXT PAGE)
㻌䐦㻌㻹㼛㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠

START POINT(X : 0700 , Y : 0540)

END POINT (X : 1080 , Y : 2200)
㻹㼛㼢㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
㻌䐢㻌㻳㼛㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼑㼚㼡 㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
<SETTING OF USER MARKER>
PAGE1
SCENE NAME SCENE1 㼀㼍㼗㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
No. SW COL DATA(X Y)
MK1 ON 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼐㼡㼞㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼟㼑㼠㻌㼍㻌㼚㼑㼣㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌
MK2 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
MK3 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㻱㻿㻯
MK4 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK5 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㻌䐧㻌㻿㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
MK6 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼙㼛㼢㼑㼟㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
䕰(NEXT PAGE) 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
㼀㼍㼗㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼐㼡㼞㼑㻌㼕㼚㻌
յ 㼟㼠㼑㼜㻌䐣㻌㼛㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼀㼔㼕㼟㻌㼙㼑㼚㼡㻌㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻌㼕㼚㻌
㼚㼑㼤㼠㻌㼜㼍㼓㼑㻚
㼟㼠㼑㼜㻌㻟㻌㼞㼑㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟㻌㼍㼞㼑㻌
ն
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌㼠㼔㼑㼕㼞㻌㼤㻙㼥㻌
㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㼟㻚

-26-
 HQLM-3120W

㻌㻴㼛㼣㻌㼠㼛㻌㼙㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㼟 㻩 㻱㻺㼀
㻩 䕦㻌䕰

㼄㻌㼍㼤㼕㼟 㻌䐣㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㻌㼚㼑㼣㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠
㻌䐟㻌㻿㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻙㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌
<MARKER>
START PO INT(X : 070 0, Y : 054 0) 㼄㻙㼅㻌㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌
END P OINT (X : 108 0 , Y : 220 0)
MARKER(16:9,1.90:1) SAFETY 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻌㼎㼘㼕㼚㼗㼕㼚㼓㻚
SHADOW LEVEL 40% 㻿㼑㼠㻌㼁㻿㻱㻾㻌
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼍㼓㼑㼚㼠㼍㻙

㼅㻌㼍㼤㼕㼟
CENTE R MARKER OFF
MARKER LEVEL 80% 㻹㻭㻾㻷㻱㻾㻌㼠㼛㻌㻻㻺㻚
㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㼑㼐㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
MARKER CO LOR 䕔
USER MA RKE R ON 㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
SCENE NA ME SCENE1 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
SETTING EXE CUTE
RETURN 㻖㻵㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌
㼕㼟㻌㼜㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚㼑㼐㻌
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞 㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌 㼍㼎㼛㼢㼑㻌㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌 㼘㼑㼒㼠㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌
㻌䐠㻌㻌㻱㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑 㻌䐤㻌㻹㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠
㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚 㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
<MARKER> 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌㼜㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌
MARKER(16:9) SAFETY START PO INT(X : 035 0 , Y : 040 0) 㼐㼑㼜㼑㼚㼐㼟㻌㼛㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
END P OINT (X : 108 0 , Y : 220 0)
SHADOW LEVEL 40%
㼞㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍㻚
CENTE R MARKER OFF
MARKER LEVEL 80%
MARKER CO LOR 䕔
USER MA RKE R ON 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼔㼕㼒㼠㼑㼐㻌㼄㻙㼅㻌
㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻾㻱㻌㻌㼛㼞㻌
SCENE NA ME SCENE1 㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
SETTING EXE CUTE 㻱㻺㼀㻌㼚㼑㼣㻚㻌
RETURN 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻚

㻌䐠㻌㻌㻱㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼕㼚㼓㻌㼙㼛㼐㼑
㻌䐥㻌㻹㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠
<SETTING OF US ER MARKER>
PAG E1
SCENE NA ME SCENE1
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌 START PO INT(X : 035 0 , Y : 040 0)
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻙㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌
END P OINT (X : 108 0 , Y : 220 0)
No. SW COL DATA(X Y) 㼍㼚㼐㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲㻌㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㻌 㼄㻙㼅㻌㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻌
MK1 ON 䕔 S䠖 030 0䚷 025 0 㼒㼛㼞㻌㼕㼚㼐㼕㼢㼕㼐㼡㼍㼘㻌
S䠖 120 0 0500 㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼟㻌㼎㼘㼕㼚㼗㼕㼚㼓㻚
MK2 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼙㼍㼞㼗㼑㼞㼟㻚
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK3 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK4 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼍㼓㼑㼚㼠㼍㻙
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㼑㼐㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
MK5 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
MK6 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
䕰(NEXT P AGE)
㻌䐦㻌㻿㼔㼕㼒㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠

START PO INT(X : 035 0 , Y : 040 0)

END P OINT (X : 165 0 , Y : 360 0)
մ6HWWLQJWKHPRGLILHGVL]H
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
<SETTING OF US ER MARKER> 㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
PAG E1
SCENE NA ME SCENE1
No. SW COL DATA(X Y) 㼀㼍㼗㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
MK1 ON 䕔 S䠖 030 0䚷 025 0
S䠖 120 0 0500 㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼐㼡㼞㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌
MK2 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼟㼑㼠㻌㼍㻌㼚㼑㼣㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK3 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼑㼚㼡㻌㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻌 㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK4 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
㼕㼚㻌㼟㼠㼑㼜㻌䐡㻌
㻱㻿㻯
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼞㼑㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
MK5 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼚㼑㼣㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㼞㼑㻌
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK6 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
S䠖䠉䠉䠉 䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉 㼄㻙㼅㻌㼏㼛㼛㼞㼐㼕㼚㼍㼠㼑㻚 㻌䐧㻌㻿㼍㼢㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼑㼚㼐㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌
䕰(NEXT P AGE) 㼙㼛㼢㼑㼟㻌㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻚
㻯㼛㼡㼚㼠㼑㼞
㼏㼘㼛㼏㼗㼣㼕㼟㼑 յ

㼁㼜㼣㼍㼞㼐㻌
㼞㼛㼠㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
ն

㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㼕㼠㼕㼍㼘㼕㼦㼑㼐㻌㼎㼥㻌㼞㼛㼠㼍㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㻾㻱㻌
㼏㼛㼡㼚㼠㼑㼞㼏㼘㼛㼏㼗㼣㼕㼟㼑㻌㻔㼙㼛㼡㼟㼑㻌㼡㼜㼣㼍㼞㼐㻕

-27-
HQLM-3120W
4-8㸬Description of MENU-UTILITY Functions

<LOCK ALL/PRESET>
CONFIG UNLOCK 䐧
ENTER PASSWORD
POWER ON CONFIG OFF 䐨
SAVE CONFIG EXECUTE
RETURN

ձ Setting the CONT VR ASSIGN ࣭R+G㸸The entire tally is displayed.

࣭ The "CONT" volume at the front can be operated   The lamp is displayed in amber when both the
for the purpose of backlight adjustment. However, R-TALLY and G-TALLY are set at ON. Both R-
when EOTF setting is HLG or PQ, backlight ad- and G-TALLY at ON.
justment is not possible. 㻌
࣭CONT : Operates for the purpose of CONTRAST   㻾㻌 Ћ>R-TALLY ON]
adjustment
   㻳㻌 Ћ[G-TALLY ON]
࣭BL : Operates for the purpose of backlight ad-
justment. This setting is reflected on the   
㻭㻹㻮㻱㻾㻌 Ћ[Both R and G-TALLY at ON]
PRESET value. 㻌
࣭Default setting is CONT.㻌 ࣭R/G ALL㸸Displays the entire TALLY only when
it is solely set to ON.
ղ Setting the CONTRAST RANGE If both R-TALLY and G-TALLY are set to ON,
࣭NORMAL 㸸When the CONTRAST volume is they will be displayed on the left and right sides.
set to the maximum intensity level, 㻌
images with low intensity can be   㻾㻌 Ћ>R-TALLY ON]
increased to 1.2 times higher.    㻳㻌 Ћ[G-TALLY ON]
In addition, sections where over-    䠮㻌  Ћ[Both R and G-TALLY at ON]
㻳㻌
flow occurs within high-intensity
㻌
images, a clip is applied.
࣭G/R ALL㸸Displays the entire TALLY only when
࣭WIDE 㸸 The contrast level can be increased
it is solely set to ON.
to two times.
*High level video may saturate. If both R-TALLY and G-TALLY are set to ON,
࣭Default setting is NORMAL. they will be displayed on the left and right sides.

ճ Setting the TALLY 㻾㻌 ←[R-TALLY ON]

࣭Set any of the following display modes of the tally    㻳㻌 Ћ[G-TALLY ON]
lamps located at the top of the front of the monitor.    㻳㻌  㻾㻌 Ћ[Both R and G-TALLY at ON]
࣭R/G㸸R is on the left side and G on the right side,
࣭Default setting is R/G.
when facing the screen. 㻌
䠮㻌 㻳㻌 մ Setting the FORMAT DISPLAY
࣭Used to set whether the channel and signal format
are displayed or not.
  [R-TALLY ON] [G-TALLY ON]㻌 ࣭3SEC ON 㸸Three seconds indication
࣭CONT ON 㸸Continuous indication
࣭G/R㸸G is on the left side and R on the right side,
࣭OFF 㸸Hidden
when facing the screen.
࣭Default setting is 3SEC.
㻳㻌 㻾㻌
㻌
 㻌
  [G-TALLY ON] [R-TALLY ON]  㻌

-28-
 HQLM-3120W
յ FRONT LIGHT operation mode
࣭The mode when the operation panel is illuminated 4K/2K/MULTI <UTILITY>

is set.
VIDEO CONT VR ASSIGN CONT
AUDIO CONTRAST RANGE NORMAL

OFF : Always off TC/WFM/VSC TALLY R/G

MARKER INPUT LOCK OFF
ON : Always on UTILITY FORMAT DISPLAY 3SEC

AUTO : Light on when the front panel switch FUNC.SW FRONT LIGHT AUTO
P.REMOTE DIMMER LOW
or dial is operated. UMD/IMD SYSTEM LOCK EXECUTE

Light off when no operation is performed for 20 C.CAPTION

USB
RETURN

seconds. NETWORK

࣭Default setting is AUTO.

RESET
INFO
EXIT

䐤 FRONT LIGHT illumination setting

࣭The brightness to illuminate the operation panel is
set.
<LOCK ALL/PRESET>
LOW 㸸Dark CONFIG UNLOCK
Select “ENTER
HIGH 㸸Bright ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD
POWER ON CONFIG OFF
࣭Default setting is LOW. SAVE CONFIG EXECUTE
RETURN

䐥 FRONT LED (OVER RANGE) illumination set-

LOCK ALL/PRESET

ting
STATUS: UNLOCK
࣭Illumination ON/OFF of OVER RANGE LED on -ENTER PASSWORD-

the front is set.

ABCDEFGHIJKLM
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Set password with 4
OFF 㸸Not illuminate 0123456789 digits.
O.RANGE 㸸Illuminate PASSWORD ****

࣭Default setting is OFF.

LOCK ALL/PRESET

ո Setting the SYSTEM LOCK STATUS: UNLOCK

࣭The data protection setting starts. -ENTER PASSWORD-

ABCDEFGHIJKLM
Shifting to LOCK ALL/PRESET NOPQRSTUVWXYZ

࣭By selecting EXECUTE, LOCK ALL/RESET set- 0123456789

PASSWORD
A four-digit password
ABCD
ting starts, and protection of various data, pass- MODE UNLOCK
is displayed hear.

word setting, and protection of preset data become

LOCK ALL/PRESET
possible. Refer to չ and պ for details.
STATUS: UNLOCK
-ENTER PASSWORD-

չ CONFIG and PASSWORD settings ABCDEFGHIJKLM

NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
CONFIG contents 0123456789

࣭UNLOCK 㸸The lock is released and all data PASSWORD ABCD

can be changed. MODE ALL LOCK Set LOCK mode.

࣭PRESET LOCK㸸The PRESET MENU setting of

item 5 is locked.
LOCK ALL/PRESET

࣭ALL LOCK 㸸 In addition to the PRESET STATUS: ALL LOCK

Lock mode setting
complete.
-ENTER PASSWORD-
MENU lock, the MENU setting ABCDEFGHIJKLM

is also locked. NOPQRSTUVWXYZ

0123456789
* When "POWER ON CONFIG" is set to "ON", PASSWORD ****
setting the LOCK MODE is not possible.
* FUNCTION switch assignments, functions re-
lated to MENU setting and PRESET MENU
setting are locked.

PASSWORD setting
࣭ Selecting ENTER PASSWORD and setting as
shown in the right figure enables the password
setting.

-29-
HQLM-3120W
պ Setting the POWER ON CONFIG ࣭POWER ON ONFIG memory method
࣭“POWER ON CONFIG”
4K/2K/MULTI <UTILITY>

 ON: When the power is turned on, MENU and VIDEO CONT VR ASSIGN CONT
AUDIO CONTRAST RANGE NORMAL
PRESET MENU settings memorized during TC/WFM/VSC TALLY R/G
MARKER INPUT LOCK OFF
“SAVE CONFIG” execution are read and UTILITY FORMAT DISPLAY 3SEC

started up.
FUNC.SW FRONT LIGHT AUTO
P.REMOTE DIMMER LOW

In addition, when MENU and PRESET UMD/IMD SYSTEM LOCK EXECUTE

C.CAPTION RETURN
MENU contents are changed after execution of USB
NETWORK
“SAVE CONFIG” the condition at power-on RESET
INFO
does not get affected. EXIT

OFF: When the power is turned on, MENU and

PRESET MENU settings before the power was
turned off are read and started up.
<LOCK ALL/PRESET>
࣭“SAVE CONFIG” CONFIG UNLOCK

The MENU and PRESET MENU set items are ENTER PASSWORD
POWER ON CONFIG OFF Execute the
memorized. When the power is turned on with SAVE CONFIG EXECUTE currently set
RETURN
state.
“POWER ON CONFIG: ON” condition, the
memorized contents are called and started up. <LOCK ALL/PRESET>

However, the following items are not memo-

CONFIG UNLOCK
ENTER PASSWORD

rized. POWER ON CONFIG ON

Set to ON
SAVE CONFIG EXECUTE
* Items which are not memorized in “POWER ON RETURN

CONFIG”

-30-
 HQLM-3120W
4-9. Description of MENU-FUNC.SW Functions

ձ Setting the function assignment of the F1 switch ճ Setting the function assignment of the F3 switch
࣭The function assignment is selectable from the ࣭The function assignment is selectable in the same
table shown below. Then the assigned function is way as described above.
controlled by pressing the F1 switch on the front ࣭Default setting is MIX TEST.
panel.
࣭Default setting is WFM ON. մ Setting the function assignment of the F4 switch
㻌 ࣭The function assignment is selectable in the same
ղ Setting the function assignment of the F2 switch way as described above.
࣭The function assignment is selectable in the same ࣭Default setting is VSC ON.
way as described above.
࣭Default setting is TC ON.

Function switches allocation table

Allocation
Function Switched content Related menu
name
CHROMA UP Increase of chroma level ON OFF MENU-VIDEOዘCROMA GAIN UP
FILE Switching of preset file D65 D93 FILE1ᨺ8 PRESET-SELECT FILE
Switching of scan mode for 2K to 4K
SCAN NORMAL NATIVE MENU-VIDEO-SCAN MODE
up-conversion
REAL SCAN Indication of no resizing 2K signal ON OFF MENU-VIDEO-REAL SCAN
SAFETY FRM+SAFE CROSS5 CROSS10
MRK SEL Marker type setting MENU-MARKER-MARKER
C.CROSS ASPECT ASP+SAF
C.MRK ON Center marker ON/OFF ON(TypeA or TypeB) OFF MENU-MARKER-CENTER MARKER
UMRK ON User marker ON/OFF ON OFF MENU-MARKER-USER MARKER
UMRK SEL User marker selection SCENE1ᨺSCENE10 OFF MENU-MARKER-SCENE NAME
DELAY DELAY selection H.DELAY V.DELAY H/V.DELAY OFF Allocation to function switches only
CH1/2→CH3/4→ዘዘዘ..
AUD CH Switching of embedded audio channel MENU-AUDIO-LINE SP/CH
→CH13/14→CH15/16→DMIX
BL DIM Increase of backlight intensity level 1→2→3→4→5→6→ዘዘዘ29→30 PRESET-BACKLIGHT DIMMIX
0,;7(67 MIX TEST SIGNAL function ON/OFF ON OFF  ..08/7,0,;7(676,*1$/
WFM ON Indication of WFM ON OFF MENU-TC/WFM/VSC-WFM DISPLAY
TC ON Indication of TIME RECORD ON(VITC or LTC) OFF MENU-TC/WFM/VSC-TC SELECTVSC
VSC ON Indication of VECTOR ON OFF MENU-TC/WFM/VSC-VECTOR SCOPE
WB Adjustment of RGB balance, etc. Indication of preset data change menu *1 PRESETዘCHANGE FILE
VIEW MODE Switching of VIEW MODE 4K MODE→2K MODE→MULTI MODE MENU-4K/2K MULTI-VIEW MODE
VIEW 4K Switching of VIEW MODE to VIEW 4K From other mode to VIEW 4K MENU-4K/2K MULTI-VIEW MODE
VIEW 2K Switching of VIEW MODE to VIEW 2K From other mode to VIEW 2K MENU-4K/2K MULTI-VIEW MODE
VIEW MULTI Switching of VIEW MODE to VIEW MULTI From other mode to VIEW MULTI MENU-4K/2K MULTI-VIEW MODE
CC ON Closed caption ON OFF MENU-C.CAPTION-CLOSED CAPTION
Control of FRONT LIGHT (operation panel
LIGHT_ON ON OFF MENU-UTILITY-FRONT LIGHT
light)

*1 Does not operate when ALL LOCK is selected.

-31-
HQLM-3120W
4-10㸬Description of MENU-P.REMOTE Functions

ձ Setting the functions of the parallel remote ࣭SHADOW 㸸 shadow ON at the level set in
pins “MENU-MARKER-SHADOW”
࣭Select the pre-assigned pin functions of the ࣭SHADOW0 㸸 shadow ON at shadow level
parallel remote control or the individual us- 0% (Black)
er-set functions. ࣭SHADOW20 㸸 shadow ON at shadow level
* By default, the pre-assigned pin functions are 20%
displayed beneath. ࣭SHADOW40 㸸 shadow ON at shadow level
* Refer to “Pin function in default” section in 40%
“Datal 2 Parallel remote pin function.” ࣭SHADOW60 㸸 shadow ON at shadow level
60%
ղ Setting the user pin function
࣭R-TALLY 㸸 R tally ON
࣭When ͆USER͇ is selected in ձ, set the in-
࣭G-TALLY 㸸 G tally ON
dividual pin functions. The following functions
࣭CHR UP 㸸 CHROMA UP ON
are available for setting.
࣭UMARK* 㸸 USER MARKER SCENE*
For details, refer to “Pin function in default”
ON
section and “Functions added by user setting”
section in “Datal 2 Parallel remote pin func-
* ͆SHADOW0 ͇, ͆SHADOW20 ͇,
tion.”
͆SHADOW40 ͇ and ͆SHADOW60 ͇
* Refer to “Data 2 Parallel remote pin function”
functions
for details.
࣭ Select two or more SHADOW settings at once,
࣭V:4K-CH-A1 㸸when input is changed to
and ͆SHADOW0͇ (Black) is given priority.
CH-A1 in 4k mode
࣭ When any of these functions is turned ON, the
࣭V:4K-CH-B1 㸸when input is changed to
“MENU-MARKER”-adjusted shadow level is
CH-B1 in 4k mode
forced to go back to the level remotely preset.
࣭V:4K-CH-HDMI㸸when input is changed to
* The functions of the following pins, which are
HDMI in 4k mode
fixed, cannot be changed.
࣭V:2K-CH-A1 㸸when input is changed to
࣭ Pin 1 (P1) : GND
CH-A1 in 2k mode
࣭V:2K-CH-B1 㸸when input is changed to
CH-B1 in 2k mode
࣭V:2K-HDMI 㸸when input is changed to
HDMI in 2k mode
࣭MONO 㸸 selection of MONO
࣭MARKER 㸸 marker ON

-32-
 HQLM-3120W
4-11㸬Description of MENU-UMD/IMD Functions
SETTING
SDI-A1 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
SDI-B1 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
SDI-B2 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
SDI-B3 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
SDI-B4 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
HDMI 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
RETURN

ձ Setting the TSL/USER DISPLAY function SETTING

switching SDI-A1 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
࣭Selects whether the UMD/IMD display is per- SDI-B1 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕

formed by TSL or DISPLAY. SDI-B2 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕

SDI-B3 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
࣭TSL: TSL is enabled
SDI-B4 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
࣭U.DISP.: USER DISPLAY is enabled SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
࣭Default setting is U.DISP. HDMI 䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕䕕
RETURN
ղ Setting the USER DISPLAY ON/OFF
࣭Selects whether the USER DISPLAY characters ࣭ Here you can set 8 characters to be displayed on
set in section մ are displayed on the screen or the screen when switching each input channel.
not.. ࣭ Character types
࣭ON: Displays on the screen
࣭OFF: Does not display 㻌 㻭㻌㻮㻌㻯㻌㻰㻌㻱㻌㻲㻌㻳㻌㻴㻌㻵㻌㻶㻌㻷㻌㻸㻌㻹㻌㻺㻌㻻㻌㻼㻌㻽㻌㻾㻌㻿㻌㼀㻌㼁㻌
࣭ Also in the MULTI display, characters corre- 㻌 㼂㻌㼃㻌㼄㻌㼅㻌㼆㻌㻜㻌㻝㻌㻞㻌㻟㻌㻠㻌㻡㻌㻢㻌㻣㻌㻤㻌㻥㻌㻙㻌㻔㻌㻕㻌㼇㼎㼘㼍㼚㼗㼉
sponding to inputs set in մ are displayed. The
following is an example of 2 MULTI.

CAMERA-A CAMERA-B

࣭Default setting is OFF

߉ Setting the USER DISPLAY character brightness

࣭Sets the brightness of characters that are dis-
played on the screen.
࣭FULL: 100% brightness
࣭1/2: 50% brightness
࣭1/7: 30% brightness
࣭Default setting is FULL.

մ Setting the USER DISPLAY character content

࣭When "EXECUTE" is performed, the following
MENU is displayed, then you can set the charac-
ter contents.

-33-
HQLM-3120W
յ Setting the TSL TALLY light-up method չ Setting the Display character size (common set-
࣭ Sets whether to light up the TALLY set on the top ting item)
of monitor or display it on the screen. ࣭Selects the character size from two types:
࣭ DISPLAY: Displays on the screen "NORMAL/SMALL".
࣭ LED: LED lights up. ࣭NORMAL: Character size, large
࣭ Default setting is DISPLAY ࣭SMALL: Character size, small
࣭Default setting is NORMAL
<TALLY lights up when it is set to LED>
պ Setting the Display character position (common
LH TALLY RH TALLY
setting item)
࣭Selects the character position from two types:
࣭BOTTOM: Displays on the bottom of screen
࣭TOP: Displays on the top of screen

<TALLY is displayed when it is set to DISPLAY>

ṲᵟᵠᵡᵢᵣᵤᵥᵦṲ

LH TALLY RH TALLY

ն Setting the TSL TALLY (left side) color

࣭Slects the display color for the TALLY (left side)
from three colors: "RED/GREEN/AMBER".
࣭Default setting is RED

շ Setting the TSL TALLY (right side) color

࣭Selects the display color for the TALLY (right side)
from three colors: "RED/GREEN/AMBER".
࣭Default setting is GREEN

ո Setting the Display character color (common

setting item)
࣭Selects the character color from seven colors:
"WHITE/YELLOW/CYAN/GREEN/MAGENT/RE
D/BLUE".
࣭Default setting is WHITE

-34-
 HQLM-3120W

UMD/IMD IndicationTable

TEXT SIZE 㸸NORMAL TEXT SIZE 㸸NORMAL

TEXT POSITION 㸸BOTTOM TEXT POSITION 㸸TOP

ᵟᵠᵡᵢᵣᵤᵥᵦ

ᵟᵠᵡᵢᵣᵤᵥᵦ

TEXT SIZE 㸸SMALL TEXT SIZE 㸸SMALL

TEXT POSITION 㸸BOTTOM TEXT POSITION 㸸TOP

ᵟᵠᵡᵢᵣᵤᵥᵦ

ᵟᵠᵡᵢᵣᵤᵥᵦ

-35-
HQLM-3120W
4-12㸬Description of MENU-C.CAPTION Functions
㻌

㻌
ձ Setting of closed caption ON/OFF ճ HD TYPE display subtitle setting
࣭The closed caption ON/OFF is set. ࣭Select from SERVICE #1 through #6.
* When the menu is displayed, the closed caption is ࣭Default setting is #1.
not displayed.
մ SD TYPE display subtitle setting
࣭Default setting is OFF.
࣭ Select from CC1 through CC4 and TEXT1
ղ Setting of the HD-SDI signal closed caption type through TEXT4
࣭708   㸸It is selected when displaying 708 of ࣭Default is CC1.
the HD-SDI signal.
յ Brightness setting of closed caption
࣭608/708 㸸It is selected when displaying 608/708
of the HD-SDI signal. ࣭The closed caption brightness is set. ࣭ Select
ͤ 708 is the closed caption signal of the from HIGH and LOW.
EIA/CEA-708 standard. ࣭Default setting is HIGH.
608/708 is the closed caption signal of the ն Display size setting of closed caption
EIA/CEA-608 standard which is transmitted
࣭ Select the character size from NORMAL or
with the EIA/CEA-708 standard.
LARGE.
࣭Default setting is 708.
࣭Default setting is NORMAL.

-36-
 HQLM-3120W
4-13㸬Description of MENU-USB MEMORY Functions

Writing from monitor to USB memory File structure

ձ Setting the date of a file to be written on USB

MENUSW.TXT
memory
࣭Used to set the editing date of a file to be written ࣭File to save the menu (USER
on a USB memory. Enter a date when you are MARKER and PRESET MENU not
going to write on the USB memory. When re- included) status and the switch set-
viewing files on a computer, the date entered tings.
here will be displayed as the date of the file. ࣭Data capacity: Approx. 6 Kbyte
࣭Since this is a model-specific file, you
࣭ Enter ͆Y (year)/M (month)/D (day)͇ in this order.
cannot download the data that was
࣭ If no date is entered, the file will be edited as of stored with a different model or vise
the date appearing currently in the menu. versa.

ղ Setting the time of a file to be written on USB

memory UMARK01.TXT (for SCENE1)
UMARK02.TXT (for SCENE2)
࣭Used to set the editing time of a file in a way
 ࣭
similar to Item ձ .
 ࣭
࣭Enter ͆H (hour) : M (minute)͇ in this order. If UMARK10.TXT (for SCENE10)
no time is entered, the file will be edited as of the
time appearing currently in the menu. ࣭File to save various setting data of the
user markers that are preset in
ճ㸫ն Writing to USB memory MENU-MARKER.
࣭To write all the setting data from the monitor to a ࣭Data capacity: Approx. 2 Kbyte (per
USB memory, select͆EXECUTE͇and press the scene)
RE . For writing details, refer to “How to write
from monitor to USB memory”.
࣭File format for writing to USB memory PRECTL.TXT (for PRESETcontrol)
PRED65.TXT (for D65)
Files to be written from the monitor to a USB PRED93.TXT (for D93)
memory are created in the following 3 text files. PREACES.TXT (for ACES)
PREDCI.TXT (for DCI)
PREFILE1.TXT (for FILE1)
PREFILE2.TXT (for FILE2)
PREFILE3.TXT (for FILE3)
PREFILE4.TXT (for FILE4)
PREFILE5.TXT (for FILE5)
PREFILE6.TXT (for FILE6)
PREFILE7.TXT (for FILE7)
PREFILE8.TXT (for FILE8)

-37-
HQLM-3120W
b) ‫ڧ‬USER MARKER
࣭File to save the PRESET menu set- ࣭Check this box if you want to download the
tings as well as all the D65, D93 and various settings (color, ON/OFF, XY coordi-
FILE1 thru -8 data. nates) of “S01 (SCENE1) to S10 (SCENE10)”
The password lock and the password that were set in the MENU-MERKER -USER
itself are not saved, however. MARKER.
࣭Data capacity: Approx. 1 Kbyte (per ࣭The files for each scene of
file) “UMARK01.TXT” to “UMERK10.TXT” will
The PRESET data of other models be downloaded.
cannot be downloaded. * Since this is a model-specific file, you cannot
download data that was stored with a dif-
ferent model.
‫ی‬Precautions on writing

࣭With a USB connected to the monitor, do not c) ‫ڧ‬PRESET

turn ON/OFF the monitor or disconnect the
࣭To download the items set on the PRESET
inserted USB memory while writing is going
on, or else the USB memory may possibly be MENU and all of the data of D65, D93, and
damaged. Be sure to disconnect the USB FILE 1 ~ 8, tick this check box.
memory in accordance with the procedure * If the data is locked with a password, you
described under͆How to write from monitor to cannot check the box. Please enter the pass-
USB memory”.
word and unlock it before downloading.
࣭Do not change the name of an automatically
generated folder or a file, or else downloading * Since this is a model-specific file, you cannot
to the monitor will be disabled. Do not download data that was stored with a dif-
modify the data in a file, or else the order of ferent model.
the data may be altered, disabling writing of * It is possible to download the file from the
the data. same model. However, the color temperature
࣭If there is a file already in the specified folder,
data stored in the FILE is different for each
the data of a new file will be overwritten on
the existing file. device; therefore the same color temperature
࣭High-security USB memories may not be cannot be achieved even if you download the
recognized. data. For this reason, the PRESET data
࣭There are some types of USB memory that can should be downloaded for the purpose of data
not be recognized, please use another USB
backup on each monitor.
memory if not recognized.

շ Executing the downloading

࣭To download the data of the items selected under
Downloading from USB memory to monitor
Item մ from the USB memory to the monitor,
press RE under͆EXECUTE.͇
ճ㸫յ Selecting items to be downloaded
Refer to “How to download from USB memory
࣭Select the items of data to be downloaded from
to monitor” for the details of writing.
the USB memory to the monitor. Tick the check
࣭If the file specified under Item մ does not exist
box.
in the specific folder of the USB memory, a
࣭Contents of individual items
warning message will appear.
a) ‫ڧ‬MENU&SW
࣭Tick this check box to download the setting
status of all the menus (excluding USER
MARKER MENU and PRESET MENU) and
the switch setting status.
࣭ The following files are dedicated to each
model and loaded as model-specific files.
“¥MENUSW.TXT”
* Since this is a model-specific file, you cannot
download data that was stored with a dif-
ferent model.

-38-
 HQLM-3120W
‫ی‬Precautions on downloading ‫ی‬Error messages during writing or downloading

࣭With a USB memory connected to the monitor, ERROR-1 A file system error is detected
do not turn ON/OFF the monitor or disconnect ERROR-2 USB memory is broken.
the inserted USB memory while downloading is ERROR-3 USB memory is not connected
going on, or else the USB memory may possibly ERROR-4 File is not found
be damaged. Be sure to disconnect the USB ERROR-4~ Various errors on access
memory in accordance with the procedure
described under “How to download from USB
memory to monitor”.
࣭Do not change the name of an automatically
generated folder or a file, or else downloading
to the monitor will be disabled. Do not modify
the data in a file, or else the order of the data
may be altered, disabling writing of the data.
࣭If a data in the monitor is locked with a
password, “PRESET LOCK” or “ALL LOCK”
will appear on the MENU as shown on the di-
agram below.
Enter the password to unlock the data first and
then download the data.
࣭It is possible in some cases that a high-security
USB memory may not be recognized by the
monitor.

-39-
HQLM-3120W
How to write from monitor to USB memory

How to write from monitor to USB memory

<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME 㻱㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼠㼕㼙㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼍㻌
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10 㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌㼎㼑㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼠㼑㼚㻌㼛㼚㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌 䕺㻼㼞㼑㼏㼍㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
09 䠖 30
TIME(H䠖M)
CONFIG
㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻚 䞉㻰㼛㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 㻖㻵㼒㻌㼚㼛㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼠㼕㼙㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌 㼡㼚㼠㼕㼘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚㻌㻵㼒㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌
USER MA RKE R 䕕䢖
㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼞㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼍㼘㼞㼑㼍㼐㼥㻌
PRESE T 䕕䢖 䢖
㼛㼡㼠㻌㼐㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼍㼥㻌㼓㼑㼠㻌
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE 㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㼑㼐㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼣㼕㼘㼘㻌㼎㼑㻌
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE
㼡㼜㼔㼑㼘㼐㻚 㼐㼍㼙㼍㼓㼑㼐㻚
UP DA TE
MAIN MPU 䕕 䞉㼁㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻲㻭㼀㻟㻞㻚
SUB MPU 䕕 㼀㼕㼏㼗㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼎㼛㼤㻌㻔䕕㻕㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌 䞉㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼏㼍㼚㼚㼛㼠㻌㼡㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌
FPGA1 䕕
㼕㼠㼑㼙㼟㻌㼠㼛㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼑㻌㼒㼞㼛㼙㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
FPGA2 䕕 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼑㼏㼡㼞㼕㼠㼥㻌㼟㼛㼒㼠㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚
FPGA3 䕕 㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻚㻌㻌
UP DA TE EXE CUTE
RETURN

㻱㻿㻯
㻵㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌
㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼚㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㻹㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㼟㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼎㼚㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘
㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻚 <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
<USB> DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10
SETTING DATE&TIME TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10 CONFIG
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌 MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
CONFIG USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 㼠㼛㻌䇾㻱㼄㻱㻯㼁㼀㻱䇿㻌 PRESE T 䢖
䕕
USER MA RKE R 䕕
䢖 㼍㼚㼐㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻾㻱㻌㻚 SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE 㻮㼥㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 RETURN
㻱㻿㻯㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼕㼟㻌 JOB CA NCEL ED ! 㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
RETURN Erro r -3
㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌 DEVICE : NO CO NNECT
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻚
㻱㻺㼀
㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼟㼚㼐㻌
<USB>
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌
SETTING DATE&TIME 㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌㼛㼡㼠㻚 JOB CA NCEL ED !
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌
Erro r -1
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 DIS K_ERROR 㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼑㼞㼞㼛㼞㻚
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
㻵㼚㻌㼏㼍㼟㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼞㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑 JOB CA NCEL ED !
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼏㼛㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼑㼐㻚
Erro r -2
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 INT_ERROR
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼛㻌
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE JOB CA NCEL ED !
㼟㼑㼑㻌㼕㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌 Erro r -3
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌
RETURN 㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻚 DEVICE : NO CO NNECT 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚
PROCESS ING䞉䞉䞉
JOB CA NCEL ED !
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼟㼍㼢㼑㼐㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌
Erro r -4
In normal state FILE NOT FO UND 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼎㼑㻌㼒㼛㼡㼚㼐㻚
<USB> 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼞㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌
SETTING DATE&TIME
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼞㻚㻌㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌㼞㼑㼏㼛㼓㼚㼕㼦㼑㼐㻘㻌
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
䇾㼁㻿㻮㻌㻹㻱㻹㻻㻾㼅䇿㻌㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕 㼛㼚㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻚
PRESE T 䢖
䕕
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㻎㼅㻱㻿㻎㻌㼕㼒㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌
RETURN
㼕㼟㻌㻻㻷㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌
SAV E TO USB MEMORY? 㻎㻺㻻㻎㻌㼠㼛㻌㼏㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘㻚
YES [SEL] / NO [ESC]
㻵㼒㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼇㻺㻻㼉㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
㻱㻺㼀
㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼑㼤㼠㼞㼍㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚
<USB> <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME SETTING DATE&TIME
㻰㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10 DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 10
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30
CONFIG CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕 USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 PRESE T 䢖
䕕
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE

RETURN RETURN
SAV EING䞉䞉䞉 㻰㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌 JOB CO MPLETED !
㼃㼞㼕㼠㼑㻌
DEVICE CAN BE RE MO VED
DO NO T REMOVE THE DEVICE 㼣㼞㼕㼠㼑 EXIT [ESC] 㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑

-40-
 HQLM-3120W
How to download from USB memory to monitor

How to download from USB memory to monitor

<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01 㼀㼕㼏㼗㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼎㼛㼤㻌 䕺㻼㼞㼑㼏㼍㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
09 䠖 30
TIME(H䠖M)
CONFIG 㻔䕕㻕㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㼕㼠㼑㼙㼟㻌㼠㼛㻌㻌
䢖 䞉㻰㼛㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌
MENU&SW
USER MA RKE R
䕕
䢖
䕕䢖
㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼒㼞㼛㼙㻌㻌㼍㻌 㼡㼚㼠㼕㼘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚㻌㻵㼒㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌
PRESE T 䕕䢖 㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼠㼛㻌 㼛㼡㼠㻌㼐㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼍㼥㻌㼓㼑㼠㻌
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻚㻌㻌
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE 㼐㼍㼙㼍㼓㼑㼐㻚
UP DA TE
MAIN MPU 䕕 䞉㼁㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻲㻭㼀㻟㻞㻚
SUB MPU
FPGA1
䕕
䕕
䞉㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼏㼍㼚㼚㼛㼠㻌㼡㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌
FPGA2
FPGA3
䕕
䕕
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼑㼏㼡㼞㼕㼠㼥㻌㼟㼛㼒㼠㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚
UP DA TE EXE CUTE
RETURN

㻱㻿㻯
㻵㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌
㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼚㼠㼛㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㻹㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㼟㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼎㼚㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻚 <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
<USB> DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01
SETTING DATE&TIME TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌 CONFIG
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 㼠㼛㻌䇾㻱㼄㻱㻯㼁㼀㻱䇿㻌 MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
CONFIG 㼍㼚㼐㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻾㻱㻌㻚 USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 PRESE T 䢖
䕕
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕 SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 㻮㼥㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE 㻱㻿㻯㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼕㼟㻌
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE RETURN
㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌 JOB CA NCEL ED ! 㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
RETURN 㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼟㼚㼐㻌 Erro r -3
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻚
㻱㻺㼀 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌 DEVICE : NO CO NNECT

㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌㼛㼡㼠㻚
<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME JOB CA NCEL ED !
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌
Erro r -1
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 DIS K_ERROR 㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼑㼞㼞㼛㼞㻚
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
㻵㼚㻌㼏㼍㼟㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼞㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑
䢖
JOB CA NCEL ED !
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼏㼛㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼑㼐㻚
USER MA RKE R 䕕 Erro r -2
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 INT_ERROR
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼛㻌
JOB CA NCEL ED !
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE
㼟㼑㼑㻌㼕㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌 Erro r -3
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌
RETURN 㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻚 DEVICE : NO CO NNECT 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚
PROCESS ING䞉䞉䞉
JOB CA NCEL ED !
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼟㼍㼢㼑㼐㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌
Erro r -4
In normal state FILE NOT FO UND 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼎㼑㻌㼒㼛㼡㼚㼐㻚
<USB> 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼞㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌
SETTING DATE&TIME
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼞㻚㻌㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌㼞㼑㼏㼛㼓㼚㼕㼦㼑㼐㻘㻌
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 䇾㼁㻿㻮㻌㻹㻱㻹㻻㻾㼅䇿㻌㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕 㼛㼚㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻚
PRESE T 䢖
䕕
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㻎㼅㻱㻿㻎㻌㼕㼒㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌
㼕㼟㻌㻻㻷㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌
RETURN
LOA D FRO M USB MEMORY? 㻎㻺㻻㻎㻌㼠㼛㻌㼏㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘㻚
YES [SEL] / NO [ESC]
㻵㼒㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼇㻺㻻㼉㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
㻱㻺㼀 㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼑㼤㼠㼞㼍㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚

<USB> <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME SETTING DATE&TIME 㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾 㻵㼚㼕㼠㼕㼍㼘㼕㼦㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻲㼕㼚㼕㼟㼔㼑㼐
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01 DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 04 / 01
TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 TIME(H䠖M) 09 䠖 30 㻻㻲㻲䊻㻻㻺
CONFIG CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕
䢖 MENU&SW 䕕
䢖
USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕 USER MA RKE R 䢖
䕕
PRESE T 䢖
䕕 PRESE T 䢖
䕕
SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE SAV E CONFIG EXE CUTE
LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE LOA D CONFIG EXE CUTE
㻰㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
RETURN RETURN
LOA DING䞉䞉䞉 JOB CO MPLETED !
DO NO T REMOVE THE DEVICE PLE ASE SHUTDOWN!
㻿㼔㼡㼠㼐㼛㼣㼚㻌 㻾㼑㼎㼛㼛㼠
㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑
㻰㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐 㻰㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐

-41-
HQLM-3120W

‫ە‬Update of firmware ռ ‫ ڧ‬FPGA3

Updating the firmware is possible by the USB ࣭When updating FPGA3, put a check mark here.
memory. Specified file name 3120fxxx.f3b 

FILE ྡ㸸3120 f xxx . f1b

ո ‫ ڧ‬MAIN MPU
    ձ ղ ճ
࣭When updating the MAIN MPU firmware, put a
check mark here.
ձModel information (fixed to 3120f)
Specified file name 3120vxxx.bin 
ղVersion information
Example㸸3120f 105 㸸 Ver1.05
չ ‫ ڧ‬SUB MPU
ճExtension
࣭When updating the SUB MPU firmware, put a FPGA1 f1b
check mark here.
FPGA2 f2b
Specified file name 3120sxxx.bin
FPGA3 f3b


FILE NAME㸸3120 v xxx . bin ս Updating
 ࣭The selected items with a check mark in items ո
ձ ղ ճ մ
through ռ are updated by EXECUTE.
ձModel information 䞉 Updating process requires approximately 0.5 to 20
 3120 : HQLM-3120W minutes, depending on the USB performance and
ղIdentification information the selected items.
 v 㸸for MAIN MPU 䞉 Updating of only SUB MPU requires nine minutes.
s 㸸for SUB MPU If updating SUB MPU is not necessary, deselect-
ճVersion information ing can reduce the required time.
Exampl㸸3120v105.bin 㸸 Ver1.05 䞉 Confirm that the file names specified in items ո
մExtension (bin) through ռ exist in the root in the USB memory.
䞉 If a specified file for the selected item does not
exist, an error is displayed, and updating stops.
䞉 After upgrading, confirm that the version is
պ ‫ ڧ‬FPGA1 properly upgraded by checking the version num-
࣭When updating FPGA1, put a check mark here. ber in "MENU - INFO."
Specified file name 3120fxxx.f1b 

ջ ‫ ڧ‬FPGA2
࣭When updating FPGA2, put a check mark here.
Specified file name 3120fxxx.f2b 

-42-
 HQLM-3120W
How to update MPU from USB memory

How to update MPU from USB memory

<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 03 / 01
䕺㻼㼞㼑㼏㼍㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
TIME(H䠖M) 00 䠖 00 䞉㻰㼛㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕 㼀㼕㼏㼗㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼎㼛㼤㻌 㼡㼚㼠㼕㼘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚㻌㻵㼒㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌
USER MARKER
PRESET
䕕
䕕
㻔䕕㻕㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌㻹㻼㼁㻌㼕㼠㼑㼙㻚 㼛㼡㼠㻌㼐㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼍㼥㻌㼓㼑㼠㻌
SAVE CONFIG EXECUTE 㼐㼍㼙㼍㼓㼑㼐㻚
LOAD CONFIG EXECUTE 㻵㼒㻌㼙㼡㼘㼠㼕㼜㼘㼑㻌㻹㻼㼁㼟㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌
UP DATE 㻲㻼㻳㻭㼟㻌㼍㼞㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌㼎㼑㻌 䞉㼁㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻲㻭㼀㻟㻞㻚
䕕
䢖
MAIN MPU
SUB MPU 䕕 㼑㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㼐㻌 䞉㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼏㼍㼚㼚㼛㼠㻌㼡㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌
FPGA1 䕕 㼟㼕㼙㼡㼘㼠㼍㼚㼑㼛㼡㼟㼘㼥㻘㻌 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼑㼏㼡㼞㼕㼠㼥㻌㼟㼛㼒㼠㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚
FPGA2 䕕
FPGA3 䕕 㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼑㼍㼏㼔㻌㼛㼚㼑㻚
UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN

㻱㻿㻯

㻵㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼚㼠㼛㻌 㻹㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㼟㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼎㼚㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻚 <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME

<USB> MAIN MPU 䕕䢖

SETTING DATE&TIME SUB MPU 䕕
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌 FPGA1 䕕
MAIN MPU 䕕 䇾㻱㼄㻱㻯㼁㼀㻱䇿㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 FPGA2 䕕
SUB MPU 䕕 FPGA3 䕕
FPGA1 䕕
㻾㻱㻌㻚 UP DATE EXECUTE
FPGA2 䕕 RETURN
FPGA3 䕕 㻮㼥㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻱㻿㻯㻌 JOB CANCELED ! 㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
UP DATE EXECUTE 㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼕㼟㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 Error 䇵 3 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻚
RETURN DEVICE : NO CONNECT
㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌
㻱㻺㼀
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌
<USB>
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌㼛㼡㼠㻚
SETTING DATE&TIME JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌
Error -1
MAIN MPU 䕕
䢖 DISK_ERROR 㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼑㼞㼞㼛㼞㻚
SUB MPU 䕕
FPGA1 䕕 㻵㼚㻌㼏㼍㼟㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼞㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑 JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼏㼛㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼑㼐㻚
FPGA2 䕕 Error -2
FPGA3 䕕 INT_ERROR
UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌 JOB CANCELED !
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌
Error -3
PROCESSING䞉䞉䞉 㼠㼛㻌㼟㼑㼑㻌㼕㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌 DEVICE : NO CONNECT 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚
㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻚
JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼟㼍㼢㼑㼐㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌
In normal state Error -4
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼞㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌 FILE NOT FOUND 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼎㼑㻌㼒㼛㼡㼚㼐㻚
<USB> 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼞㻚㻌㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
SETTING DATE&TIME
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌
MAIN MPU 䕕
䢖 㼞㼑㼏㼛㼓㼚㼕㼦㼑㼐㻘㻌䇾㻰㻻㼃㻺㻸㻻㻭㻰䇿㻌
SUB MPU 䕕 㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌㼛㼚㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻚 㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼀㻭㻸㻸㼅㻌㼕㼟㻌㼘㼕㼠㻘㻌㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻻㻲㻲㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼛㼏㼏㼡㼞㼞㼑㼐
FPGA1 䕕
FPGA2 䕕 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㻎㼅㻱㻿㻎㻌㼕㼒㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌 㼃㼔㼕㼘㼑㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌
FPGA3 䕕 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻲㻝㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻲㻟㻌㼡㼚㼠㼕㼘㻌
UP DATE EXECUTE 㼕㼟㻌㻻㻷㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌 㼎㼛㼠㼔㻌㻲㻝㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻲㻟㻌 㻳㻚㻌㼀㻭㻸㻸㼅㻌㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠㼟㻚
RETURN 㻎㻺㻻㻎㻌㼠㼛㻌㼏㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘㻚 㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻻㻺
DOWNLOAD?
YES [SEL] / NO [ESC] 㻵㼒㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼇㻺㻻㼉㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌 㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼑㻌㼕㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㻗
F1 F2 F3
㻱㻺㼀
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌 㼟㼍㼙㼑㻌㼣㼍㼥㻌㼍㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
㼍㼚㼐㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼑㼤㼠㼞㼍㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚 㼒㼕㼓㼡㼞㼑㻌㼎㼑㼘㼛㼣
<USB> <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME SETTING DATE&TIME 㻮㼘㼕㼚㼗㼕㼚㼓㻌 㻸㼕㼓㼔㼠㼕㼚㼓
MAIN MPU 䕕
䢖 MAIN MPU 䕕
䢖
䇾㻳㻚㼀㻭㻸㻸㼅䇿㻌 䇾㻳㻚㼀㻭㻸㻸㼅䇿
SUB MPU 䕕 SUB MPU 䕕
㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾 㼛㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼘㼑㼒㼠 㻻㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼞㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㻒㻌㼘㼑㼒㼠 㻲㼕㼚㼕㼟㼔㼑㼐
FPGA1 䕕 FPGA1 䕕 㻻㻲㻲䊻㻻㻺
FPGA2 䕕 FPGA2 䕕
FPGA3 䕕 FPGA3 䕕
UP DATE EXECUTE UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN RETURN
DOWNLOADING䞉䞉䞉
MAIN䚷MPU䊻V01.05 PLEASE SHUTDOWN !
30 % DONE 㻰㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
DO NOT REMOVE THE DEVICE
㻿㼔㼡㼠㼐㼛㼣㼚㻌 㻾㼑㼎㼛㼛㼠
㻰㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓 㻰㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑
㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑

-43-
HQLM-3120W
How to update FPGA from USB memory

How to update FPGA from USB memory

<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
DATE(Y/M/D) 18 / 03 / 01
䕺㻼㼞㼑㼏㼍㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
TIME(H䠖M) 00 䠖 00 䞉㻰㼛㻌㼚㼛㼠㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌
CONFIG
MENU&SW 䕕 㼡㼚㼠㼕㼘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼣㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼔㼍㼟㻌㼎㼑㼑㼚㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚㻌㻵㼒㻌㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌
䕕
USER MARKER
䕕
㼛㼡㼠㻌㼐㼡㼞㼕㼚㼓㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㻘㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼙㼍㼥㻌㼓㼑㼠㻌
PRESET 㼀㼕㼏㼗㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼎㼛㼤㻌㻔䕕㻕㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌
SAVE CONFIG
LOAD CONFIG
EXECUTE
EXECUTE 㻲㻼㻳㻭㻌㼕㼠㼑㼙㻚 㼐㼍㼙㼍㼓㼑㼐㻚
UP DATE 䞉㼁㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼠㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㻲㻭㼀㻟㻞㻚
MAIN MPU 䕕 㻵㼒㻌㼙㼡㼘㼠㼕㼜㼘㼑㻌㻲㻼㻳㻭㼟㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌
SUB MPU 䕕 䞉㼀㼔㼑㻌㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼏㼍㼚㼚㼛㼠㻌㼡㼟㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼣㼕㼠㼔㻌
㻹㻼㼁㼟㻌㼍㼞㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌㼎㼑㻌㼑㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㼐㻌
FPGA1
FPGA2
䕕
䢖
䕕 㼟㼕㼙㼡㼘㼠㼍㼚㼑㼛㼡㼟㼘㼥㻘㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼑㼍㼏㼔㻌 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼑㼏㼡㼞㼕㼠㼥㻌㼟㼛㼒㼠㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚
FPGA3 䕕 㼛㼚㼑㻚
UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN

㻱㻿㻯

㻵㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼚㼠㼛㻌 㻹㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㼟㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼎㼚㼛㼞㼙㼍㼘
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
<USB>
㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻚 SETTING DATE&TIME
<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME MAIN MPU 䕕
㻹㼛㼢㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼏㼡㼞㼟㼛㼞㻌㼠㼛㻌 SUB MPU 䕕
䢖
MAIN MPU 䕕 FPGA1 䕕
SUB MPU 䕕 䇾㻱㼄㻱㻯㼁㼀㻱䇿㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 FPGA2 䕕
FPGA1 䢖
䕕 㻾㻱㻌㻚 FPGA3 䕕
FPGA2 䕕 UP DATE EXECUTE
FPGA3 䕕 㻮㼥㻌㼜㼞㼑㼟㼟㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻱㻿㻯㻌 RETURN
UP DATE EXECUTE JOB CANCELED !
RETURN
㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼕㼟㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 Error - 3
㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞㻌㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌
㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌㼟㼚㼐㻌 DEVICE : NO CONNECT 㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻚
㻱㻺㼀
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌
<USB>
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼚㻌㼛㼡㼠㻚
SETTING DATE&TIME JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌
Error -1
MAIN MPU 䕕 㻵㼚㻌㼏㼍㼟㼑㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼞㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑 DISK_ERROR 㼕㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼑㼞㼞㼛㼞㻚
SUB MPU 䕕
FPGA1 䢖
䕕 JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼏㼛㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼑㼐㻚
FPGA2 䕕 Error -2
FPGA3 䕕 㻵㼚㼟㼑㼞㼠㻌㼍㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼚㼠㼛㻌 INT_ERROR
UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 JOB CANCELED !
㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌
PROCESSING䞉䞉䞉 㼙㼛㼚㼕㼠㼛㼞㻌㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻚 Error -3
㼚㼛㼠㻌㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚
DEVICE : NO CONNECT

In normal state 㼀㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼞㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌 JOB CANCELED ! 㻰㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㼟㼍㼢㼑㼐㻌㼒㼕㼘㼑㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌

Error -4
㼐㼕㼟㼜㼘㼍㼥㼑㼐㻌㼔㼑㼍㼞㻚㻌㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌 FILE NOT FOUND 㼚㼛㼠㻌㼎㼑㻌㼒㼛㼡㼚㼐㻚
<USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME
㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥㻌㼕㼟㻌㼞㼑㼏㼛㼓㼚㼕㼦㼑㼐㻘㻌
䇾㻰㻻㼃㻺㻸㻻㻭㻰䇿㻌㼍㼜㼜㼑㼍㼞㼟㻌
MAIN MPU 䕕 㼛㼚㼟㼏㼞㼑㼑㼚㻚
SUB MPU 䕕
FPGA1 䢖
䕕
FPGA2 䕕 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㻎㼅㻱㻿㻎㻌㼕㼒㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌
FPGA3 䕕
UP DATE EXECUTE
㼕㼟㻌㻻㻷㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌
RETURN 㻎㻺㻻㻎㻌㼠㼛㻌㼏㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘㻚
DOWNLOAD?
YES [SEL] / NO [ESC] 㻵㼒㻌㼥㼛㼡㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼇㻺㻻㼉㻌㼔㼑㼞㼑㻘㻌 㻺㼛㼠㼑㻦㻌㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼎㼛㼠㼔㻌㻹㻼㼁㻌㼍㼚㼐㻌㻲㻼㻳㻭㻌㼍㼞㼑㻌
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼐㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㼕㼟㻌㼐㼕㼟㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼑㼐㻌 㼑㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼑㼐㻌㼍㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼍㼙㼑㻌㼠㼕㼙㼑㻘㻌㼕㼠㻌㼣㼛㼞㼗㼟㻌
㻱㻺㼀
㼍㼚㼐㻌㼏㼍㼚㻌㼎㼑㻌㼑㼤㼠㼞㼍㼏㼠㼑㼐㻚 㼠㼔㼑㻌㼟㼍㼙㼑㻌㼍㼟㻌㼁㻼㻰㻭㼀㻱㻌㼛㼒㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻹㻼㼁㻌㼛㼚㻌
㼠㼔㼑㻌㼜㼞㼑㼢㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼜㼍㼓㼑㻚
<USB> <USB>
SETTING DATE&TIME SETTING DATE&TIME

MAIN MPU 䕕 MAIN MPU 䕕

SUB MPU 䕕
䢖
SUB MPU 䕕
䢖
㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾 㻵㼚㼕㼠㼕㼍㼘㼕㼦㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚 㻲㼕㼚㼕㼟㼔㼑㼐
FPGA1 䕕 FPGA1 䕕
FPGA2 䕕 FPGA2 䕕 㻻㻲㻲䊻㻻㻺
FPGA3 䕕 FPGA3 䕕
UP DATE EXECUTE UP DATE EXECUTE
RETURN RETURN
DOWNLOADING䞉䞉䞉
FPGA1䊻䡒01.05 PLEASE SHUTDOWN !
30 % DONE
DO NOT REMOVE THE DEVICE 㻰㼞㼍㼣㻌㼛㼡㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼁㻿㻮㻌㼙㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥

㻰㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㼕㼚㼓 㻿㼔㼡㼠㼐㼛㼣㼚㻌 㻰㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑 㻾㼑㼎㼛㼛㼠

㼙㼑㼟㼟㼍㼓㼑

-44-
 HQLM-3120W
4-14㸬Description of MENU-NETWORK Functions

ձ REMOTE number
յ TSL MONITOR ID RT setting
䞉 Set the ID number for the optional serial remote
࣭Set the TSL ID number at the upper right screen.
controller, "SRC-400," and the IR remote controller,
"RCT-30A" from 01 through 99. ն TSL MONITOR ID LB setting
䞉 Set the ID number which is used during the remote ࣭Set the TSL ID number at the lower left screen.
control in the network from 01 through 99.
࣭Default setting is 01. շ TSL MONITOR ID RB setting
࣭Set the TSL ID number at the lower right screen.
ղ Setting of the monitor ID number for TSL 4K
MODE/2K MODE ո IPV4 SETTING setting
䞉 Set the monitor ID number of the TSL control using ࣭Following items ‫ ڢ‬through ռ are used for the
RS485 in 4K MODE and 2K MODE for VIEW setting of Ethernet network.
MODE.
չ IP㻌 ADDRESS setting
䞉 No. "0 to 126" is available for setting the ID num-
ber. ࣭Example 192.168.1.100

䞉 The number of units which can be driven by the պ SUBNET㻌 MASK setting
chain connection is up to 32 units per line. However,
࣭Example 255.255.255.0
up to 126 units can be controlled individually by
increasing the number of lines. ջ DEFAULT GATEWAY setting
࣭Default setting is 000. ࣭Example 1192.168.1.1

ճ Setting of the monitor ID number for TSL ռ SPEED / DUPLEX setting

MULTI MODE 䞉 Setting of communication method
࣭When the VIEW MODE is MULTI MODE, the TSL 䞉 AUTO, 100M FULL, 100M HALF
control ID number of each of the four screen areas
divided is set by the following items մ through շ.
No. "0 to 126" is available for setting the ID number.
䞉 The number of units which can be driven by the
chain connection is up to 32 units per line. However,
up to 126 units can be controlled individually by
increasing the number of lines.

մ TSL MONITOR ID LT setting

࣭Set the TSL ID number at the upper left screen.
࣭Default setting is 000.

-45-
HQLM-3120W
4-15㸬Description of MENU-RESET Functions

ձ Executing the initialization of setup data ղ Selecting the preset files to be initialized
࣭Perform this setting to restore the default set- ࣭ When “PRESET” is selected in ձ , select a file
tings. for restoring the setup data to the facto-
࣭ALL 㸸 Factory settings are restored for ry-settings.
all PRESET data, all MENUs ࣭ALL 㸸 All the preset files are initialized.
and switches. ࣭FILEx 㸸 FILEx only is initialized.
࣭PRESET 㸸 Factory settings are restored for (x:1 to 8)
all PRESET data.
࣭FILE1-8 㸸 FILE1 to FILE8 only are initial-
࣭MENU&SW 㸸 Factory settings are restored for
ized.
all MENUs and switches.
࣭D65 㸸 REF D65 only is initialized.
࣭To initialize, select an item to be initialized with
the RE and press the RE . The confirmation ࣭D93 㸸 REF D93 only is initialized.
message appears. Press the RE again. To cancel ࣭D65/D93 㸸 REF D65 and D93 only are ini-
the initialization, just press the ESC switch. tialized.
* The initialization of data cannot be executed if ࣭ACES 㸸 REF ACES only is initialized.
͆PRESET LOCK͇ or ͆ALL LOCK͇ is set in ࣭DCI P3 㸸 REF DCIP3 only is initialized.
"MENU-SYSTEM LOCK-UTILITY".
To initialize the data, unlock the settings. ࣭Default setting is D65.
࣭Default setting is ALL.

-46-
 HQLM-3120W
4-16㸬Description of MENU-INFO Functions
(1) INFO (1/2)
㻌
㻌

ձ Displaying the format չ Displaying of F3 switch assignment function

࣭Displays the format of the signal being displayed. ࣭Displays the function assigned to the F3 switch.

ղ Displaying the payload պ Displaying of F4 switch assignment function

࣭Displays the payload data of the signal being dis- ࣭Displays the function assigned to the F4 switch.
played.
ջ Displaying the power on status
ճ Displaying the model name ࣭Displays the set power on status.
࣭Displays model name.
ռ Displaying the main MPU version
մ Displaying the file name ࣭Displays the current main MPU version.
࣭Displays the name of the file being set.
ս Displaying the sub MPU version
յ Displaying the backlight value ࣭Displays the current sub MPU version.
࣭Displays the set backlight value.
վ Displaying the FPGA1 version
ն Displaying the view mode ࣭Displays the current FPGA1 version.
࣭Displays the set view mode.
տ Displaying the FPGA2 version
շ Displaying of F1 switch assignment function ࣭Displays the current FPGA2 version.
࣭Displays the function assigned to the F1 switch.
ր Displaying the FPGA3 version
ո Displaying of F2 switch assignment function ࣭Displays the current FPGA3 version.
࣭Displays the function assigned to the F2 switch.

- 47 -
HQLM-3120W
(2) INFO (2/2) - PAYLOAD INFO
Display information on payload relation.

ձ VIDEO SOURCE չ Picture Structure

࣭Displays a source name which indicates the pay- ࣭The picture structure information is extracted from
load information. the payload values and displayed.
࣭ When VIDEO SOURCE is SDI-B1/2/3/4 in 4K
պ Colorimetry
MODE, or when in MULTI MODE, displayed
࣭The color space information is extracted from the
source can be toggled by pressing RE or ENT.
payload values and displayed.
ղ B1 B2 B3 B4
ջ Lum & Color Difference
࣭Each of payload Byte 1 to Byte 4 is displayed.
࣭The information regarding color difference signal
ճ Interface ID calculating method is extracted from the payload
values and displayed.
࣭The interface ID is extracted from the payload
values and displayed. ռ Link Assignment

մ Picture Rate ࣭The information regarding link assignment num-

bers is extracted from the payload values and dis-
࣭The picture rate information is extracted from the
played.
payload values and displayed.
ս Aspect Ratio
յ Sampling Structure
࣭The picture aspect ratio information is extracted
࣭The sampling structure information is extracted
from the payload values and displayed.
from the payload values and displayed.
վ Horizontal Sampling
ն Bit Depth
࣭The number of horizontal pixels of picture is ex-
࣭The bit depth information is extracted from the
tracted from the payload values and displayed.
payload values and displayed.
տ Link1 Audio Copy
շ Transfer Characteristic ࣭Whether or not Link 1 audio is copied from the
࣭The transfer characteristic information is extracted payload values is displayed.
from the payload values and displayed. ࣭When it is ON, Link 1 audio is embedded to the
source. When it is OFF, original audio is embed-
ո Transport Structure
ded.
࣭The transport structure information is extracted
from the payload values and displayed.

- 48 -
 HQLM-3120W
5㸬Preset Menu Function㻌
5-1㸬List of preset menu
࣭To execute the preset menu, press PRESET switch.
* Turn off the menu screen.
SELECT FILE D65 䐟
FILE REFERENCE INPUT 䐠
BACKLIGHT DIM. 9 䐡
PRESET CHANGE FILE D65
COLOR SPACE BT.709 䐢 CHROMA 100
YCbCr MATRIX BT.709 䐣 BRIGHT 0.0
CONTRAST 89.0
EOFT 2.2 䐤 R.BKG 0.0
HLG TONEMAP MODE1 䐥 G.BKG 0.0 PRESET COPY FILE
B.BKG 0.0
HLG VARIABLE 1000 䐦 FROM D65
R.GAIN 100.0 TO FILE
HLG CLIP(R/G/B) 100 / 100 / 100 䐧 G.GAIN 100.0
EXECUTE
MASTER CLIP 100 䐨 B.GAIN 100.0
RETURN RETURN
CHANGE FILE 䐩
COPY FILE 䐪
EXIT

ձ Selection of files ճ Setting the backlight brightness level

࣭Select a file from among D65, D93, ACES, DCI P3 ࣭Set the brightness of the backlight at 1 to 30 levels.
and FILE1 to FILE8. (Fixed to 30 for HDR)
࣭D65 㸸for 6500K files ࣭ When the backlight brightness level is raised, the
࣭D93 㸸for 9300K files black level is also slightly raised. Therefore set the
࣭ACES 㸸for ACES files backlight brightness level according to the ambi-
࣭DCI P3 㸸for DCI P3 files ent condition.
࣭FILE1 to 8 㸸User files ࣭ This function can be assigned to a function
࣭The following data is memorized in these 10 files. switch on the front panel.
࣭CHROMA 㸸CHROMA data * The rough setting target of brightness (160 cd/m2)
࣭BRIGHT 㸸BRIGHTNESS data specified in Adobe RGB is 10. (when the contrast
࣭CONT 㸸CONTRAST data is in default setting)
࣭R.GAIN 㸸R.GAIN data * Use at lower backlight brightness level extends
࣭G.GAIN 㸸G.GAIN data the life span of the backlight.
࣭B.GAIN 㸸B.GAIN data ࣭Default setting are as follows.
࣭R.BKG 㸸R.BACKGROUND data SDR mode 㸸9
࣭G.BKG 㸸G.BACKGROUND data HDR mode 㸸30(fixed)
࣭B.BKG 㸸B.BACKGROUND data
* The D65 and D93 have been factory-set for the մ COLOR SPACE setting
color temperatures of 6500K and 9300K, respec- ࣭The color gamut corresponding to each standard is
tively. The FILE1 thru -8 data have been facto- set.
ry-set to be the same as for the D65. 䞉 AUTO: Judge the BT.2020/709 color gamut from the
࣭ Default setting is INPUT. payload and set automatically.
䞉 BT.2020: Color gamut corresponding to ITU-R BT.2020

ղ Setting a file change at the time of channel 䞉 BT.709: Color gamut corresponding to ITU-R BT.709
change 䞉 DCI-P3 D65: Color gamut corresponding to DCI-P3 D65
࣭Set the association of channel change with file 䞉 DCI-P3: Color gamut corresponding to DCI-P3
change. 䞉 ACES: Color gamut corresponding to ACES
࣭INPUT: Files are memorized for each chan- 䞉 ADOBE RGB: Color gamut corresponding to Adobe RGB
nel: When a channel is changed to 䞉 PANEL: Color gamut of the panel itself
another, the stored file is recalled 䞉 LOG G1: Color gamut corresponding to LOG G1
automatically. 䞉 LOG G2: Color gamut corresponding to LOG G2
࣭COMMON: Just one preset file is fixed for all ࣭ Default setting is BT.709.
channels.
࣭ Default setting is INPUT.㻌

- 49 -
HQLM-3120W
յ YCbCr MATRIX setting պ MASTER CLIP setting
࣭YCbCr matrix is set. ࣭In addition to the setting in չ, the clip point of high
AUTO : Automatically judge the conversion matrix bright section where R/G/B is simultaneously oper-
by the payload, ated is set.
BT.2020 : Setting corresponding to ITU-R BT.2020 The set value 100 is a condition without a clip. The
BT.709 : Setting corresponding to ITU-R BT.709 number of clips increases as the number is equal to
࣭ Default setting is BT.709. or less than 100.
ն 㻱㻻㼀㻲㻌㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓 ࣭ Default setting is100.

࣭EOTF gamma curve is set.

AUTO : Either one of HLG1/PQ is automatically ջ Change of preset data
judged from the payload. PRESET CHANGE FILE D65
CHROMA 100
HLG1 : HLG method gamma (with OOTF pro- BRIGHT 0.0
cessing) CONTRAST 89.0
R.BKG 0.0
HLG2 : HLG method gamma (without OOTF G.BKG 0.0
processing) B.BKG 0.0
R.GAIN 100.0
LOG1 : LOG1 setting gamma G.GAIN 100.0
LOG2 : LOG2 setting gamma B.GAIN 100.0
RETURN
PQ : PQ method gamma
ACES P. : ACES Proxy gamma
࣭Change the data of a file selected in "ձ Selection
2.2 : Gamma 2.2
of files".
2.4 : Gamma 2.4
࣭How to change data
2.6 : Gamma 2.6
Select “CHANGE FILE” and press the RE or ENT.
࣭ Default setting is 2.2. The following “PRESET CHANGE FILE” menu
appears.
շ TONEMAP setting
࣭For details, refer to Item “How to change PRESET
࣭In the case of HLG1/HLG2/LOG1/LOG2/PQ/ACES.P,
data”.
compressed by the curve from a certain level so that
the high luminance signal subsides to the maximum
࣭Adjustable
brightness of the panel.
࣭CHROMA
MODE1 It is uncompressed to a certain level. Used to set the color density.
but compress at a higher level..
Variable range : 0㹼200
MODE2 Compression from the lower level com-
࣭ Default setting is 100.
pared to the MODE1.
MODE3 Compress full Range..
࣭BRIGHT㸦BRIGHTNESS㸧
MODE4 Does not compress. and clip with the
Used to set the black level.
maximum brightness of the panel. Variable range : -60.0㹼+60.0
࣭ Default setting is MODE2. ࣭ Default setting is 0.0.

ո HLG VARIABLE setting

࣭CONT㸦CONTRAST㸧
࣭The maximum brightness to HLG1 gamma curve is
Used to set the white level.
set from 800 / 900 / 1000 / 1100 / 1200 cd/m2.
Variable range : 0.0㹼120.0㸦WIDE : 0.0㹼200.0㸧
࣭ Default setting is 1000.
࣭ Default setting is 100.
չ HLG CLIP (R/G/B) setting
࣭R.BKG㸦R.BACKGROUND㸧
࣭By the setting when EOTF is "HLG1 / 2," the clip
Used to set the black balance (red component) at
point at high bright section of R/G/B is set.
dark level.
The set value 100 is a condition without a clip. The
Variable range : -25.0㹼+25.0
number of clips increases as the number is equal to
࣭ Default setting is 0.0.
or less than 100.
࣭ Default setting is 100/100/100.
࣭G.BKG㸦G.BACKGROUND㸧
Used to set the black balance (green component)
at dark level..
Variable range : -25.0㹼+25.0
࣭ Default setting is 0.0.

- 50 -
 HQLM-3120W

࣭B.BKG㸦B.BACKGROUND㸧
Used to set the black balance (blue component)
at dark level..
Variable range : -25.0㹼+25.0
࣭ Default setting is 0.0.

࣭R.GAIN
Used to set the white balance (red component)
at bright level.
Variable range : 0.0㹼200.0
࣭ Default setting is 100.0.

࣭G.GAIN
Used to set the white balance (green component)
at bright level.
Range : 0.0㹼200.0
࣭ Default setting is 100.0.

࣭B.GAIN
Used to set the white balance (blue component)
at bright level.
Range : 0.0㹼200.0
࣭ Default setting is 100.0.

ռ Copying of file data

PRESET COPY FILE

FROM D65 㼍
TO FILE 㼎
EXECUTE 㼏
RETURN

(a) Select the source file (D65, D93, FILEx [x: 1 to 8])
using the RE.
(b) Select the destination for the file (FILEx [x: 1 to
8], FILE1 - FILE8) using the RE.
* When FILE1 - FILE8 are selected, data is cop-
ied to FILE1 through FILE8.
(c) When the RE is pressed, the copy confirmation
message appears. To copy, press the RE again.
If not, press the ESC switch. 㻌

- 51 -
HQLM-3120W

How to change PRESET data

How to change PRESET data

㻱㻺㼀
㻩 㻩 䕦㻌䕰
㻼㻾㻱㻿㻱㼀
㻭
SELECT FILE D65
FILE REFERENCE INPUT
PRESET CHANGE FILE D65
BACKLIGHT DIM. 9 CHROMA 100
COLOR SPACE BT.709 BRIGHT 0.0
CONTRAST 89.0
YCbCr MATRIX BT.709
R.BKG 0.0
EOFT G.BKG 0.0
HLG TONEMAP MODE1 B.BKG 0.0
R.GAIN 90.5
HLG VARIABLE 1000
G.GAIN 94.5
HLG CLIP(R/G/B) 100 / 100 / 100 B.GAIN 100.0
MASTER CLIP 100 RETURN

CHANGE FILE
COPY FILE
㻱㻿㻯
EXIT
Data registration
PRESET CHANGE FILE D65 PRESET CHANGE FILE D65
PRESET CHANGE FILE D65 CHROMA 100 CHROMA 100
CHROMA 100 BRIGHT 0.0 BRIGHT 0.0
BRIGHT 0.0 CONTRAST 89.0 CONTRAST 89.0
CONTRAST 89.0 R.BKG 0.0 R.BKG 0.0
R.BKG 0.0 G.BKG 0.0 G.BKG 0.0
G.BKG 0.0 B.BKG 0.0 B.BKG 0.0
B.BKG 0.0 R.GAIN 90.5 R.GAIN 90.5
R.GAIN 100.0 G.GAIN 94.5 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠 G.GAIN 94.5
G.GAIN 100.0 B.GAIN 100.0 䇿㻿㻭㼂㻱䇿 B.GAIN 100.0
B.GAIN 100.0 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌
RETURN RETURN
RETURN 䇾㻾㻚㻳㻭㻵㻺䇿
SAVE? SAVE / CLEAR DATA SAVE !

Data clear
D65
R.GAIN䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷100.0䚷 PRESET CHANGE FILE D65 PRESET CHANGE FILE D65
CHROMA 100 CHROMA 100
BRIGHT 0.0 BRIGHT 0.0
CONTRAST 89.0 CONTRAST 89.0
D65 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌 R.BKG 0.0 R.BKG 0.0
䇾㻾㻚㻳㻭㻵㻺䇿 G.BKG 0.0 G.BKG 0.0
R.GAIN䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷90.5䚷
B.BKG 0.0 B.BKG 0.0
㻱㻿㻯 R.GAIN 90.5 R.GAIN 90.5
㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌 G.GAIN 94.5 G.GAIN 94.5
䇾㻳㻚㻳㻭㻵㻺䇿 B.GAIN 100.0 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠 B.GAIN 100.0
D65
RETURN 䇿㻯㻸㻱㻭㻾䇿 RETURN
G.GAIN䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷100.0䚷
SAVE? SAVE / CLEAR DATA CLEAR !

D65 㻯㼔㼍㼚㼓㼑㻌
G.GAIN䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷94.5䚷 䇾㻳㻚㻳㻭㻵㻺䇿

D65 㻼㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻱㻿㻯㻌㼟㼣㼕㼠㼏㼔㻌
G.GAIN䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷94.5䚷 㻔㼙㼛㼡㼟㼑㻌㼞㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼏㼘㼕㼏㼗㻕㻌
㻱㻿㻯
㼍㼒㼠㼑㼞㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼕㼟㻌
㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚

- 52 -
 HQLM-3120W
6. Mouse menu function
6-1㸬Basic procedure of the mouse menu

- 53 -
HQLM-3120W
6-2㸬Basic procedures on the MENU and PRESET MENU screens

ձ Basic mouse behavior on the MENU screen ճ Basic mouse behavior on the CHANGE PRE-
SET screen

㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠

PRESET CHANGE FILE D65

CHROMA 100
BRIGHT 0.0
CONTRAST 100.0
R.BKG 0.0
G.BKG 0.0
B.BKG 0.0
㻹㼛㼢㼑 R.GAIN 100.0
G.GAIN 100.0
B.GAIN 100.0
RETURN

࣭Left-click the mouse to go to the right of the

MENU screen and select an item. Right-click it
to return to the left-hand items.
࣭The scroll wheel is used to move vertically and to 㻾㼑㼠㼡㼞㼚 㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼙㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥
change the settings.
࣭When there are two or more settings to select on ࣭The behavior is the same as Item ձ.
the right-hand data like the USB memory’s date
setting, left-click the mouse to go to the settings
to modify.
մ Basic mouse behavior on the USER MARKER
screen
ղ Basic mouse behavior on the PRESET MENU
screen

㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠 㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠
㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠
<SETTING OF USER MARKER>
PAGE1
SELECT FILE D65 SCENE NAME SCENE1
FILE REFERENCE INPUT No. SW COL DATA(X Y)
BACKLIGHT DIM. 9 MK1 ON 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
COLO R SPACE BT.709
MK2 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
YCbCr MATRIX BT.709 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
EO FT MK3 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
HLG TONEMAP MODE1 㻹㼛㼢㼑
㻹㼛㼢㼑 HLG VARIABLE 1000
MK4 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
HLG CLIP(R/G/B) 100 / 100 / 100 MK5 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MASTE R CLIP 100 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
MK6 OFF 䕔 S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
CHANGE FILE
S䠖䠉䠉䠉䚷䠉䠉䠉䠉
COPY FILE 䕰(NEXT PAGE)
EXIT

㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼙㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥
㻿㼏㼞㼛㼘㼘㻌㼡㼜

㻾㼑㼠㼡㼞㼚 㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼏㼘㼑㼍㼞㻌㻔㻙㻕
㻾㼑㼠㼡㼞㼚 㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼙㼛㼐㼕㼒㼥
The behavior is the same as Item ձ.
࣭The behavior is the same as Item ձ.
࣭

- 54 -
 HQLM-3120W
7. Specifications
7-1㸬General specifications ࣭3G-SDIx4 Quad Link 4K
(1) Supply voltage
3840x2160
AC input
59.94p,29.97p,23.98p,29.97psf,23.98psf
࣭100 V㸫120 Vs10 % 50㸭60 Hz
50p,25p,24p,25psf,24psf,60p,30p,30psf
࣭200 V㸫240 Vs10 % 50㸭60 Hz
4096x2160
(2) Power consumption
59.94p,29.97p,23.98p,29.97psf,23.98psf
AC input : 150 Wmax
50p,25p,24p,25psf,24psf,60p,30p,30psf
࣭AC 100㸫120 V 㸸1.73 Amax
࣭AC 200㸫240 V 㸸0.90 Amax 12G-SDI
(3) Ambient operating temperature/humidity, 3840x2160
ambient storage temperature/humidity 59.94p,47.95p,29.97p,23.98p,
Operation: 0 °C to +40 °C / 20 % to 85 % 50p,48p,25p,24p,60p,30p
(no condensing) 4096x2160
Storage: -20 °C to +60 °C / 5 % to 85 % 59.94p,47.95p,29.97p,23.98p,
(no condensing)㻌 50p,48p,25p,24p,60p,30p
(4) Outside dimensions (excluding protrusions) * See “Data1 Input Signal Compatible
750(W)*459(H)*102.2 mm(D), 11U㻌 Formats”.
(5) Weight (excluding the stand and option) d) Embedded audio
Main chassis 㸸Approx.14.5 kg Sampling frequency㸸48 kHz
Stand 㸸Approx.3.9 kg (Synchronized with video clock)
(6) Standard accessories e) Embedded audio output
Operation manual, parallel remote connector, By selecting one pair of channels from ch1/2
AC Power cable – ch15/16 and DOWNMIX, the audio can be
x1 each output from the analog audio outputs, the
㻌 headphone output terminal, and built-in
7-2㸬Rated performance stereo speakers.
(1) SDI signal 㻌
a) Input terminal (2) HDMI signal
12G/3G/HD : BNC 2 lines a) Input terminal
3G/HD : BNC 3 lines HDMI 1 line
800 mVp-ps10 % 75 Ȑ b) Input signal format
b) Output terminal 1920x1080
12G/3G/HD : BNC 2 lines 59.94i,29.97p,23.98p
3G/HD : BNC 3 lines 50i,25p,24p,24psf,60i,30p
800 mVp-ps10 % 75 Ȑ 1280x720
c) Input signal format (Auto detection) 59.94p,50p,60p
3840x2160
HD-SDI 59.94p,29.97p,23.98p
1920x1080
50p,25p,24p,60p,30p
59.94i,29.97p,23.98p,29.97psf,23.98psf
4096x2160
50i,25p,24p,25psf,24psf,60i,30p,30psf
59.94p,29.97p,23.98p
1280x720
50p,25p,24p,60p,30p
59.94p,29.97p,23.98p,29.97psf,23.98psf
640x480
50p,25p,24p,25psf,24psf,60p,30p,30psf
59.94p,60p
2048x1080
720x480
29.97p,23.98p,29.97psf,23.98psf
59.94p,60p
25p,24p,25psf,24psf,30p,30psf
720x567
3G-SDI 50p
1920x1080 * See “Data1 Input Signal Compatible
59.94p,50p,60p Formats”.
2048x1080 c) HDCP
59.94p,47.95p,50p,48p,60p HDCP2.2 support
d) Audio format
L-PCM

- 55 -
HQLM-3120W
e) Audio output (7) EOTF
By selecting one pair of channels from ch1/2, ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG)
ch3/4, ch5/6, and ch7/8 and DOWNMIX, the SMPTE ST.2084 (PQ)
audio can be output from the analog audio 2.2
outputs, the headphone output terminal, and 2.4
2.6
built-in stereo speakers.
LOG1
LOG2
(3) Analog audio output
ACES Proxy
a) Output terminal
* Auto or manual setting is possible with
RCA 2 line
PRESET MENU.
b) Output level
0dBV max
(digital audio data: at the 0dBFS) (8) Color space
*0dBV=1Vrms ITU-R BT.2020ͤ
c) Output impedance ITU-R BT.709
10Ȑor more DCI P3 D65ͤ
d) Input signal source DCI P3ͤ
Analog audio input or embedded audio input ACESͤ
can be output. The signal to be output is set Adobe RGBͤ
on “MENU-AUDIO”. LOG G1
LOG G2
(4) Headphones output
* Auto or manual setting is possible with
a) Output terminal
PRESET MENU.
ȍ3.5 Stereo mini jack type
* RGB color points are not fully included.
b) Output
85 mW/ch (RL: 32 Ȑ)
c) Input signal source 7-3㸬Specifications for LCD Panel
Analog audio signal or embedded audio sig- (1) Number of pixels
nal can be output. 4096 (H) x 2160 (V) dots
To select one of these signals, make the set-
ting in “MENU-AUDIO-LINE/SP CH”. (2) Screen size (display area)
697.958 mm(H) x 368.064 mm(V)
(5) Speaker output 17:9 aspect : Diagonal 78.9 cm, 31.1Vtype
a) Rated output (2 channel) 16:9 aspect : Diagonal 75.1 cm, 29.6Vtype
1W+1W or more
b) Input signal source (3) Peak Brightness (brightness performance for a
Analog audio input or embedded audio input single panel)
can be output. A signal to be outputted is 350 cd/੍ typ.
set in “MENU-AUDIO-LINE/SP CH”.
* With the headphones connected, no sound is (4) Contrast ratio
heard from the speakers. 1500:1 typ.

(6) Color temperature setting (5) Panel tone

12 types: D65, D93, ACES, DCI P3 and USER RGB 10 bit each
setting: 8 types (FILE 1 to 8)
(6) Number of display colors
1,073,741,824 colors

(7) Viewing angle

Vertical/horizontal㸸178 °
(Contrast ratio 10 : 1 or more)

(8) Top polarizer type

Anti-Glare

- 56 -
 HQLM-3120W
7-4㸬Applicable Standerds The “safety marker in aspect” refers to
(1) Safety standards the safety marker with respect to the
࣭UL60950-1 aspect marker display zone, and can be
࣭EN60950-1 preset in 1 % increments in the range of
(2) Electromagnetic interface 80-99 %.
࣭VCCI (Class-A) Corresponding to each aspect marker.
࣭FCC (Class-A) <Marker level>
࣭EN55032 (Class-A) ࣭ Set in five steps of 20 %, 40 %, 60 %, 80 % and
࣭EN55103-2 E4 100 %
(3) Specific chemical substance regulation
࣭RoHS Directive compliance (3) Shadow function
(4) Confirmation of HDMI ATC testing Creates a shadow outside the aspect areas
࣭HDMI CTS version 1.4b and 2.0u with 4:3, 13:9, 14:9, 15:9, 16:9, 1.85:1 and
2.35:1.
7-5㸬Functions <Types>
(1) Front operation “Various aspect markers” + “Shadow”
a) Switch “Various aspect markers” + “Safety marker
POWER ON/OFFࠊMONOࠊAPTࠊSCREENࠊ in aspect” + “Shadow”
MARKࠊF1ࠊF2ࠊF3ࠊF4ࠊMENUࠊ Shadow only
PRESETࠊENTࠊESCࠊ <Shadow contrast level>
UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHTࠊINPUT SELECTࠊ Set in four steps of 0 %, 20 %, 40 % and
CH BࠊTEST 60 %.
b) Variable Control
CHROMA, BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, (4) User marker function
AUDIO Function for the user to draw their desired lines
c) Rotary encoder and boxes in the unit of pixels.
Various settings a) No. of types: 10 scenes x 12 types (1 scene: 12
types)
(2) Marker function b) No. of colors: 7
a) Center marker c) Drawable sizes: 4096x2160 pixels
(Set to ON/OFF using the MENU) d) Drawing method: RE or USB mouse
b) Safety marker * Patent acquisition
Any of the following markers is displayed
according to the image aspect ratio. (5) UMD/IMD display with TSL protocol
<Types> Character display function controlled by RS485.
Safety area marker Either TSL or user display should be selected for
࣭“Safety area marker” + 100 % the UMD/IMD display (MENU selection).
The “safety area markers” are effective a) Standard: RS485
over the entire screen and can be preset b) Connector: R J-45 (loop through)
in 1 % increments in the range of c) Number of connections: up to 32 devices (per
80-99 %. line)
࣭5 divided crosshatch d) Protocol: TSL UMD V3.1
࣭10 divided crosshatch e) Characters: ASCII (alphanumeric), up to 8
࣭Cross characters, 7 colors
࣭16:9 aspect marker f) TALLY display: Red/Green/Amber
࣭15:9 aspect marker g) Display in the screen or LED display
࣭14:9 aspect marker Display position: Top/bottom
࣭13:9 aspect marker
࣭4:3 aspect marker
࣭1.85:1 aspect marker
࣭2.35:1 aspect marker
࣭“Each aspect marker” + “Safety marker
in aspect”

- 57 -
HQLM-3120W
(6) UMD/IMD display with user display (10) WFM monitor display
A function used to set a material name on a a) Single channel display
channel basis (SDI-A1, SDI-B1, SDI-B2, SDI-B3, Select from Y, Cb, Cr, R, G, B
SDI-B4, SDI-B1/B2/B3/B4 and HDMI) and dis- b) Component display
play the material name when switching the in- Select from Y/Cb/Cr, RGB
puts. c) Display size
a) Characters: ASCII (alphanumeric), up to 8 256 x 256
characters, 7 colors 384 x 384
b) Display position: Top/bottom d) Display color
White
(7) USB memory function Y G : Green
a) Contents of the memory Cb B : Blue
MENU setting Cr R : Red
࣭User marker
࣭PRESET data (11) Vector scope display
a) Display size
(8) Embedded audio level meter 256 x 256
a) Display method 384 x 384
Superimposed on screen b) Display color
b) Display channel White, Green
8 ch (max)
The display can be selected from “ch1 to 2, ch1 to 4, (12) Time code display
ch1 to 8, ch9 to 10, ch9 to 12, ch9 to 16”. a) Supported signal fomat
c) Display position 3G/HD-SDI signal
4 types b) Type
d) Display mode VITC, LTC
8 modes c) Conforming standard
e) Display segment SMPTE RP-188
52 segments (including -҄) d) Display size
f) Display color 2type
Reference level (-18 dBFS or -20 dBFS) is
selected in the MENU. (13) Closed caption display
࣭ -20 dBFS a) Supported signal format
-҄ to -22 dBFS : Green
3G/HD-SDI signal
-20 to -2 dBFS : Yellow
0 dBFS : Red b) Conforming standard
࣭-18 dBFS SMPTE 334-1, SMPTE 334-2
-҄ to -20 dBFS : Green CEA-708, CEA-608
-18 to -2 dBFS : Yellow
0 dBFS : Red
g) Peak hold (14) Automatic switching by payload of HDR and
About 1 sec color space
* It can be set to "OFF" in the MENU. a) Supported format
h) Release time 12G/3G/HD-SDI signal payload
About 0.4 sec b) Conforming standard
ITU-R BT.2077
(9) Multi-screen display ITU-R BT.1120-9
When 2K / HD format signal is input, the fol-
lowing multi-screen displays are possible using
CH-B1 ~ CH-B4 input.
࣭4 MULTI (4 screens)
࣭3 MULTI (3 screens)
࣭2 MULTI (2 screens)
When "3 MULTI" and "2 MULTI" mode, WFM
and vector scope can be displayed in the vacant
area.

- 58 -
 HQLM-3120W
7-6㸬Remote Control 8. Mounting
(1) Parallel remote control Equipped with "100 x 100 mm or 200 x 100mm"
Input connector: HD D-SUB 15-pin mounting holes compliant with the VESA mount
For the pin function, refer to "Data2 Parallel interface standard.
Remote Pin Function". Other mounting holes also available.
(Refer to the “10. External View”.)
(2) Serial (RS-485) remote control
(The SCR-400 controller is optional.)
a) Connector: RJ-45 (loop-through) 9. Options
b) Maximum number of connections: 32 units (1) RCT-30A
Extension by increasing the number of lines “Infrared remote controller”
is possible. Just this unit can control most of the monitor
c) Interface: RS-485 functions. Up to 99 monitors can be controlled
* See "Data4: Control with remote control- individually.
ler" for the control items.”
(2) SRC-400
(3) Wireless remote control “Serial remote controller”
(The RCT-30A controller is optional.) A serial remote controller that allows you to
* See "Data4: Control with remote controller" remote control the monitor with RS485 in-
for the control items.” ter-face by loop-through connection via LAN ca-
ble.
(4) Ethernet remote control One controller can control all functions of
For details of this function please refer to mon-itors. By connecting the monitors with the
another document. loop-through connection via LAN cable, one line
can control 32 monitors, and three lines can
control up to 96 monitors individually or all at
once.
Since the controller can be also connected with
PC and Ethernet, it is possible to individually
control each monitor from the PC screen through
network control.
࣭Weight: approx. 0.83Kg
࣭Color: black

* The specifications and appearance of this

product are subject to change for product im-
provement without notice.

- 59 -
HQLM-3120W
10㸬External View
[UNIT㸸mm]

- 60 -
 HQLM-3120W
Data 1 Input Signal Compatible Formats
㻵㻺㻼㼁㼀㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼕㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼕㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼕㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻌㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻴㻰㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻌㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼕㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼕㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼕㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

- 61 -
HQLM-3120W
㻵㻺㻼㼁㼀㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻠㻤㼜㻛㻠㻣㻚㻥㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻞㻜㻠㻤㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻌㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻠㻤㼜㻛㻠㻣㻚㻥㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻛㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻽㼡㼍㼐㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗㻌㻟㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㻼㼟㻲㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㻼㼟㻲㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻛㻌㻮㻙㻰㻸㻌 㻿㻽㻰㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻠㻤㼜㻛㻠㻣㻚㻥㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌㻦㻌㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

㻝㻞㻳㻙㻿㻰㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌㻦㻌㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌 㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘㻌㻭㻌 㻞㻿㻵㻌

- 62 -
 HQLM-3120W
㻵㻺㻼㼁㼀㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㻌 㻿㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻢㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻠㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻢㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻠㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼕㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼕㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼕㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼕㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻞㻤㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻣㻞㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼕㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼕㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻝㻥㻞㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻝㻜㻤㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻟㻤㻠㻜㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻢㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻥㻚㻥㻠㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻡㻜㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻟㻜㼜㻛㻞㻥㻚㻥㻣㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻡㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻠䠖㻠㻌 㻾㻳㻮㻛㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻤㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

㻴㻰㻹㻵㻌 㻠㻜㻥㻢㻌 㽢㻌 㻞㻝㻢㻜㻛㻞㻠㼜㻛㻞㻟㻚㻥㻤㼜㻌 㻠䠖㻞䠖㻞㻌 㼅㻯㼎㻯㼞㻌 㻝㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌

- 63 -
HQLM-3120W
Data 2 Parallel Remote Pin Functions

Connector Face View on Rear Panel Wiring of Remote Connector (by default)

  GND 1
 
V:4K-CH-B1 on 2
NC 3
G TALLY on 4
NC 5

CHROMA UP on 6
 
MONO on 7
NC 8
<Connector on system side> NC 9
D-Sub 15-pin (male) mini-type NC 10
*Connector
CD0115PA100: CVILUX-made NC 11
*Case MARKER on 12
DE-C8-J9-F2-1: Japan Aviation
Electronics Industry-made SHADOW on 13
*The above parts or equivalents are R TALLY on 14
supplied as standard.
V:4K-CH-A1 on 15 

* Notes: Remote control terminals should only be controlled by "short circuit to GND pin" or "open" and not
control voltage.
Application of voltage may cause failure.

‫ ڦ‬Pin functions by default

Pin No. Function External Assignment for Function
1 GND Connecting remote terminals to this pin enables ON control.
2 V-4K-CH-B1 on Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (4K mode) setting to CH-B1 (12G-SDI).
3 NC No connection
4 G TALLY on Connect to Pin 1 to set G TALLY to ON.
5 NC No connection
6 CHROMA UP on Connect to Pin 1 to set CHROMA GAIN UP function to ON.
7 MONO on Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR/MONO setting to MONO.
8 NC No connection
9 NC No connection
10 NC No connection
11 NC No connection
12 MARKER on Connect to Pin 1 to set MARKER to ON.
Connect to Pin 1 to set SHADOW to ON.
13 SHADOW on
* The shadow is displayed in the “MENU-MARKER” -preset level.
14 R TALLY on Connect to Pin 1 to set Red TALLY to ON.
15 V-4K-CH-A1 on Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (4K mode) setting to CH-A1 (12G-SDI).

* Functions explained in this table can be allocated to any pins in the same way as the user setting function in
the next section.

- 64 -
 HQLM-3120W
‫ ڦ‬Additional user-set functions
Functions in “Pin function in the default condition” described in the preceding section and the following func-
tions can be allocated to any desired pin.
Pin No. Function External Assignment for Function
User setting SHADOW0 on Connect to Pin 1 for running with shadow level 0% (black).
* Priority is given to this pin function if any other shadow setting pin is pressed at once.
User setting SHADOW20 on Connect to Pin 1 for running with shadow level 20%.
User setting SHADOW40 on Connect to Pin 1 for running with shadow level 40%.
User setting SHADOW60 on Connect to Pin 1 for running with shadow level 60%.
User setting U.MRK SCENE01 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE01) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE02 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE02) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE03 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE03) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE04 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE04) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE05 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE05) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE06 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE06) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE07 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE07) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE08 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE08) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE09 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE09) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting U.MRK SCENE10 Connect to Pin 1 to set USER MARKER (SCENE10) to on. It turns off when the connection is opened.
User setting VIEW 4K Connect to Pin 1 to switch the VIEW MODE setting to 4K.
User setting VIEW 2K Connect to Pin 1 to switch the VIEW MODE setting to 2K.
User setting VIEW MULTI Connect to Pin 1 to switch the VIEW MODE setting to MULTI.
User setting EOTF:HLG1 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to HLG1.
User setting EOTF:HLG2 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to HLG2.
User setting EOTF:PQ Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to PQ.
User setting EOTF:LOG1 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to LOG1.
User setting EOTF:LOG2 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to LOG2.
User setting EOTF:2.2 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to 2.2.
User setting EOTF:2.4 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to 2.4.
User setting EOTF:2.6 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the EOTF setting to 2.6.
User setting CS:AUTO Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO.
User setting CS:BT.2020 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to BT.2020.
User setting CS:BT.709 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to BT.709.
User setting CS:DCI P3 D65 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to DCI P3 D65.
User setting CS:DCI P3 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to DCI P3.
User setting CS:ACES Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to ACES.
User setting CS:ADOBE RGB Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to ADOBE RGB.
User setting CS:PANEL Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to PANEL.
User setting CS:LOG G1 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to LOG G1.
User setting CS:LOG G2 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the COLOR SPACE setting to LOG G2.
User setting YM:AUTO Connect to Pin 1 to switch the YCbCr Matrix setting to AUTO.
User setting YM: BT.2020 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the YCbCr Matrix setting to BT.2020.
User setting YM: BT.709 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the YCbCr Matrix setting to BT.709.
User setting V:4K-CH-B1/2/3/4 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (4K mode) setting to CH-B1/2/3/4(Quad Link).
User setting V:4K-HDMI Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (4K mode) setting to HDMI.
User setting V:2K-CH-A1 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to CH-A1.
User setting V:2K-CH-B1 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to CH-B1.
User setting V:2K-CH-B2 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to CH-B2.
User setting V:2K-CH-B3 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to CH-B3.
User setting V:2K-CH-B4 Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to CH-B4.
User setting V:2K-HDMI Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (2K mode) setting to HDMI.
Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (MULTI mode) setting to CH-B1, CH-B2,
User setting V:MULTI-SDI ONLY
CH-B3 and CH-B4.
Connect to Pin 1 to switch the input (MULTI mode) setting to CH-B1, CH-B2,
User setting V:MULTI-SDI/HDMI
CH-B3 and HDMI.
* The functions of pins other than 1 are freely user-settable in the MENU.
* When SCENE 01 ~ 10 of USER MARKER is set with multiple pins, lower numbers are given priority.
For example, when both SCENE 01 and SCENE 03 are ON, SCENE 01 takes precedence.
* See also the text "4-10. MENU - P.REMOTE function explanation".
* If you assign the function to select the input channel to the pin, the last channel turned on will be valid.
At that time, please be sure to turn off other input channel selection terminals at the same time.Also, if all
input channels are turned off, the input of the last input channel turned on will be displayed as it is.

- 65 -
HQLM-3120W
Data3 RS-485 Pin Functions
* When connecting to the SRC - 400, use a straight cable between the SRC - 400 and the monitor and
between the monitor and the next monitor.

Pin No. IN terminal OUT terminal

㻝 㸯 TXD㸩 TXD㸩
㻞 2 TXD㸫 TXD㸫
㻟
㻠 3 RXD㸩 RXD㸩
㻡
㻢 4 GND GND
㻣 5 GND GND
㻤
6 RXD㸫 RXD㸫
7 NC NC
   㸺Female terminal㸼 8 NC NC

- 66 -
 HQLM-3120W
Data4 Control with Remote Controller
㽢㸸There is a button, but it is not assigned to the function. 䠉㸸There is no button.

Serial remote Wireless remote

Control item Remarks
SRC-400 RCT-20A/30A
■Switch functions
VIDEO SELECT 㸫 䕿㻌(*1)㻌 TEST mode by long press
VBS A 㽢㻌 䠉㻌
VBS B 㽢㻌 䠉㻌
SDI A 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 SDI-A1 is selected.
SDI B 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 TBD
DVI㸦HDMI㸧 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 HDMI is selectrd
COMP 㽢㻌 䠉㻌
OP1 (SDI C) 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 TBD
OP2 (SDI D) 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 TBD
OP3 䕿㻌 䠉㻌 TBD
OP4 㽢㻌 䠉㻌
TEST 䕿㻌 䠉(*2)
APERTURE ON/OFF 䕿㻌 䕿㻌
COLOR/MONO 䕿㻌 䕿㻌
COMB/TRAP 㽢㻌 䕿㻌
BLUE ONLY ON/OFF 䕿㻌 䕿㻌
DELAY (H/V/PCR) 䕿㻌 䕿㻌
4:3/16:9 SCAN SELECT 㽢㻌 㽢㻌
NORMAL/UNDER SCAN 㽢㻌 㽢㻌
SYNC INT/EXT 䠉㻌 㽢㻌
FILE SELECT 䕿㻌(*3)㻌 䕿㻌
MARKER ON/OFF 䕿㻌 䠉㻌
MARKER SELECT 䕿㻌(*3)㻌 䕿㻌
Function setting possible
FUNCTION1-4 ON/OFF 䕿㻌 䠉㻌
with menu.
MENU/ENT/ESC 䕿㻌 䕿㻌
■Variable preset level functions
HUE 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
CHROMA 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
BRIGHTNESS 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
CONTRAST 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
APERTURE LEVEL 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
R/G/B GAIN 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
R/G/B BACKGROUND 䕿㻌(*4)㻌 䕿㻌(*4)㻌
WB2 㼀㻮㻰㻌 㻌
*1㸸Every time the switch is pressed, it will toggle as follows in the VIEW MODE setting of the menu.
 4K MODE: CH-A1→CH-B1→CH-B1/B2/B3/B4 (Quad Link)→HDMI
2K MODE: CH-A1→CH-B1→CH-B2 →CH-B3→CH-B4 →HDMI
MULTI MODE: No operation
*2㸸To select the TEST signal, hold down the VIDEO switch for about 3 seconds.
*3㸸Operation with a FUNCTION switch.
*4㸸Adjustments through MENU operation.

- 67 -
HQLM-3120W

Notes

- 68 -
㻌

MODEL HQLM-3120W
31-inch 4K/HD Multi Format LCD Monitor

OPERATION MANUAL
1’st edition: June. 2018

Published by Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.

© June. 2018 by Utsunomiya Factory
of Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.

‫ ڦ‬All right reserved. Reproduction or duplication, without permission of Ikegami

Tsushinki Co., Ltd. of edition or contents in whole in part, any manner, is prohibited.
‫ ڦ‬Specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

204:( Edited by Koyo 21 Co., Ltd. 18 June.

Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.
5-6-16, Ikegami, Ohta-ku, Tokyo, 146-8567, Japan
Phone: +81-(0)3-5700-4114 Fax: +81-(0)3-5748-2200
URL: https://www.ikegami.co.jp/en/
Contact: https://www.ikegami.co.jp/en/inquiry-general

Ikegami Electronics (U.S.A.), Inc.

300 Route 17 South, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430, U.S.A.
Phone: +1-201-368-9171 Fax: +1-201-569-1626
URL:https://www.ikegami.com
Contact: https://www.ikegami.com/contact-form

Ikegami Electronics (Europe) GmbH

Ikegami Strasse 1, D-41460 Neuss, GERMANY
Phone: +49-(0)2131-123-0 Fax: +49-(0)2131-102820
URL: http://www.ikegami.de
Contact: http://www.ikegami.de/contact.html

Ikegami Electronics Asia Pacific Pte.LTD.

1 Tampines Central 5, #3-3 CPF Tampines Building,
Singapore 529508
Phone: (+65)6260-8820 Fax: (+65)6260-8896
URL: https://sg.ikegami.co.jp/
Contact: https://sg.ikegami.co.jp/inquiry-general

Property of

PRINTED IN JAPAN